JP2011098010A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of attracting a player's interest to other periods than a period in which a presentation mode can be discriminated if a mode is changed to the presentation mode in which it is difficult to specify whether the game is controlled in a normal game state or in a special game state after termination of a specific game state. <P>SOLUTION: The presentation mode is controlled according to whether the game is controlled at least in the normal game state or in a probability variable game state when a 2R probability variable jackpot, or 2R non-probability variable jackpot or minor jackpot is won, and according to the symbol variation stop time (S624-S626). <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention allows a game ball to be hit into a game area to play a game, and displays the variable display of special identification information based on the winning of the game ball in the start area provided in the game area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine including special display means for deriving and displaying a result and a variable winning ball apparatus that changes to a state advantageous to a player.

  As a game machine generally known as this type of game machine, it is possible to play a game ball by hitting a game ball into the game area, such as a pachinko game machine. A special display means (special symbol display) for displaying a variation of the special identification information (special symbol) based on the winning of the game ball in the starting area (start winning prize opening) and deriving and displaying the display result; Some have a variable winning ball apparatus that changes to an advantageous state (open state).

  As such a gaming machine, after the big hit gaming state, regardless of whether or not a special gaming state is granted, the player does not know whether or not a certain variation state as a special gaming state is given. There is one that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game by controlling to a concealment mode as an effect mode for performing a common effect. When such a gaming machine is controlled in the concealment mode, when the probability variation state is given, the ratio of the transition to the specific effect mode in which the specific notice effect is frequently generated is set high, and the game is performed in the concealment mode. By recognizing the effect mode according to the type of the notice effect, the player can recognize the expectation level to which the probability variation state is given based on the type of the effect mode (Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-18020 (paragraph numbers 0044 to 0057, FIGS. 4 to 6)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document 1, the player can recognize the expected degree to which the probability variation state is given by identifying the type of the effect mode based on the notice effect. Therefore, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when it becomes a common production mode, the player's interest cannot be directed at a time other than the time when the notice production that makes it possible to identify the type of the production mode is executed. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such a situation, and the purpose thereof is an effect mode in which it is impossible to specify whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled after the end of the specific game state. Sometimes, a gaming machine capable of directing the player's interest at a time other than the time when the effect mode can be identified is provided.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) It is possible to play a game ball by hitting a game ball into the game area (game area 7), and a start area provided in the game area (first start winning opening 13, second start winning opening 14) Special display means (first special symbol display unit 8a, second special symbol display unit 8b) for displaying and displaying the display result of the special identification information (special symbol) variably based on the winning of the game ball. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a variable winning ball device (special variable winning ball device 20) that changes to a state advantageous to the player (open state),
Before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, a predetermined specific determination (determination of whether or not the numerical data of the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the determination value of the jackpot, that is, the jackpot Determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S240 in FIG. 37);
Specific determination means (game control microcomputer) for determining whether or not to control to a specific gaming state (15R non-probable big hit or 15R probable big hit) advantageous to the player when the specific decision is made by the prior decision means 560, S243 in FIG. 37),
When the specific determination (decision to be a big hit) is performed by the prior determination means, and when it is not determined by the specific determination means to control to the specific gaming state, the variable winning device is controlled in a predetermined special manner. After performing a special control (2 times release control or 15 times high speed release control) for changing to a different state, the probability that the specific decision is made by the predetermining means (big hit probability) is higher than the normal gaming state Special decision means (game control microcomputer 560, S243 in FIG. 37, S243 in FIG. 37) for determining whether or not to perform special transition control (big hit game control per 2R probability variation big hit) to shift to a high special game state (probability change state) S114 to S117, S313 in FIG. 41),
State maintenance that maintains the gaming state before the special control is performed as a gaming state in which the special identification information is displayed in a variable manner after the special control is performed when the specific determination is not performed by the prior determination unit Maintenance determining means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S245 and S246 in FIG. 37) for determining whether or not to perform control (small hit game control);
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S241 to S246 in FIG. 37, FIG. 34) which controls the game state according to the determination results of the specific determination means, the special determination means, and the maintenance determination means. S114 to S117),
In response to the variable display of the special identification information, the effect identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed. (The third symbol stop in FIG. 25), when the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the effect identification information is fixed (all symbols stop in FIG. 25). Production control means (production control microcomputer 100, S401 to S406 in FIG. 43),
It is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is controlled to be the normal gaming state or the special gaming state as a mode of the rendering executed by the rendering control means when the display identification information is displayed in a variable manner ( Since the display mode of the effect mode on the effect display device 9 is common to the probability change state and the non-probability change state, it is impossible to specify whether or not the display mode of the effect display device 9 is in the probability change state. Whether or not it is possible to specify whether or not the state is surely changed by a display device other than the device 9 (display devices such as the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the status display LED) is not specified. Effect mode control for controlling to any one of a plurality of modes (modes A to C, N in FIG. 3) that are different in the degree of expectation of being controlled in the special gaming state. means Effect control microcomputer 100, S602 of FIG. 48, S603, S621~S627 of FIG. 49, S631～S642 in FIG. 50, it includes a S547) and FIG. 47,
The effect control means derives and displays the display result of the effect identification information so that it is impossible to specify which of the normal game state and the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed (FIG. 14). And, as shown in FIG. 15, the same variation pattern type is selected for 2R probability variation big hit and small hit), and depending on whether the special transition control or the state maintenance control is performed, The time before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed and before the display result of the identification information for presentation is derived and displayed (from the third symbol stop of the decorative symbol of FIG. 25 to the stop of all symbols) This is the stop time, and is determined at different ratios (determined to be 5 seconds, 6 seconds, or 13 seconds before) based on the variation time of the special symbol (when 2R probability variation big hit is shown in FIG. 26) (A) Based on the R probability variation during the stop time table to determine the symbol stop time, when the Koatari determining symbol stop time based on 2R non probability variation at-Koatari the stop time table of FIG. 26 (B)),
The effect mode control means sets the mode of the effect according to at least whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and the time before the determination. 49 (S624 to S627 in FIG. 49, the first selection table to the sixth selection table in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 in which the selection ratio of the transition destination of the production mode is different when the latent mode is entered, are shown in FIG. Based on the pre-latency data selection table, it is selected and determined according to whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit and the symbol stop time, and based on the determined selection table, the transition destination production mode is determined).

  According to such a configuration, it is impossible to specify whether the game state is controlled to the normal game state or the special game state as the mode of the effect by the effect control when the variation display of the effect identification information is performed. At the same time, it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of modes with different expectations of being controlled in the special gaming state. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to a special game state can be raised with the kind of production mode. In addition, when the special control is performed, it is impossible to specify whether the control state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, and the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed, and whether the special transition control is performed is maintained. Depending on whether control is performed, before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the time before determination until the display result of the identification information for presentation is derived and displayed is determined at a different rate. And, when special control is performed, the mode of the effect is controlled according to at least whether the normal gaming state or the special gaming state is controlled and the pre-decision time. The length can increase the player's expectation for the special gaming state. Since the combination of such an effect mode and the pre-determination time can increase the player's expectation for the special game state, the player's interest can be directed to the stop time of the effect identification information. it can. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the production mode can be identified. Further, for the player, recognizing the length of the pre-confirmation time is difficult to recognize compared to, for example, recognizing that the advance notice of entering the special gaming state has been made. As a result, it is difficult to be sure whether or not the player is controlled to the special gaming state based on the length of time before the determination, so in the mode of the effect after the special control, the player It is possible to always have an interest in whether or not the game state is special.

(2) It is possible to play a game ball by driving it into the game area (game area 7), and the start areas provided in the game area (first start winning opening 13, second start winning opening 14) Special display means (first special symbol display unit 8a, second special symbol display unit 8b) for displaying and displaying the display result of the special identification information (special symbol) variably based on the winning of the game ball. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a variable winning ball device (special variable winning ball device 20) that changes to a state advantageous to the player (open state),
Before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the specific determination (determination of whether or not the numerical data of the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the determination value of the jackpot, that is, the jackpot A pre-determining means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S240 in FIG. 37) for determining whether or not to perform (deciding);
Specific determination means (game control microcomputer) for determining whether or not to control to a specific gaming state (15R non-probable big hit or 15R probable big hit) advantageous to the player when the specific decision is made by the prior decision means 560, S243 in FIG. 37),
When the specific determination (decision to be a big hit) is performed by the prior determination means, and when it is not determined by the specific determination means to control to the specific gaming state, the variable winning device is controlled in a predetermined special manner. After performing a special control (2 times release control or 15 times high speed release control) for changing to a different state, the probability that the specific decision is made by the predetermining means (big hit probability) is higher than the normal gaming state Special decision means (game control microcomputer 560, S243 in FIG. 37, S243 in FIG. 37) for determining whether or not to perform special transition control (big hit game control per 2R probability variation big hit) to shift to a high special game state (probability change state) S114 to S117, S313 in FIG. 41),
When the specific determination (decision to be a big hit) is performed by the prior determination means, and when it is not determined by the specific determination means to control to the specific gaming state, the variable winning device is controlled in a predetermined special manner. Normal determination means for determining whether or not to perform normal transition control (2R non-probable big hit game control) for shifting to the normal gaming state after performing special control (two-time release control) for changing to a special state ( A game control microcomputer 560, S114 to S117 in FIG. 34, S313 in FIG.
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S241 to S244 in FIG. 37, FIG. 34) that controls the game state in accordance with the determination results of the specific determination means, the special determination means, and the normal determination means. S114 to S117),
In response to the variable display of the special identification information, the effect identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed. (The third symbol stop in FIG. 25), when the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the effect identification information is fixed (all symbols stop in FIG. 25). Production control means (production control microcomputer 100, S401 to S406 in FIG. 43),
It is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is controlled to be the normal gaming state or the special gaming state as a mode of the rendering executed by the rendering control means when the display identification information is displayed in a variable manner ( Since the display mode of the effect mode on the effect display device 9 is common to the probability change state and the non-probability change state, it is impossible to specify whether or not the display mode of the effect display device 9 is in the probability change state. Whether or not it is possible to specify whether or not the state is surely changed by a display device other than the device 9 (display devices such as the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the status display LED) is not specified. Effect mode control for controlling to any one of a plurality of modes (modes A to C, N in FIG. 3) that are different in the degree of expectation of being controlled in the special gaming state. means Effect control microcomputer 100, S602 of FIG. 48, S603, S621~S627 of FIG. 49, S631～S642 in FIG. 50, it includes a S547) and FIG. 47,
The effect control means derives and displays the display result of the effect identification information so that it is impossible to specify which of the normal game state and the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed (FIG. 14). And, as shown in FIG. 15, the same variation pattern type is selected for 2R probability variation big hit and 2R non-variable big hit), and depending on whether the special transition control or the state maintenance control is performed, Before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, and before the display result of the presentation identification information is derived and displayed (from the third symbol stop of the decorative symbol to the stop of all symbols in FIG. 25) Is determined at different ratios (decided to be 5 seconds, 6 seconds, or 13 seconds before) based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol. FIG. The symbol stop time is determined based on the 2R probability change stop time table in (A), and in the case of small hit, the symbol stop time is determined based on the 2R non-probable change / small hit stop time table in FIG. )
The effect mode control means sets the mode of the effect according to at least whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and the time before the determination. The first selection table to the sixth selection table in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 in which the selection ratio of the transition destination of the production mode is different when the latent mode is entered are based on the pre-latent data selection table in FIG. In other words, whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit is selected and the symbol stop time is selected and determined, and the transition destination production mode is determined based on the determined selection table).

  According to such a configuration, it is impossible to specify whether the game state is controlled to the normal game state or the special game state as the mode of the effect by the effect control when the variation display of the effect identification information is performed. At the same time, it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of modes with different expectations of being controlled in the special gaming state. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to a special game state can be raised with the kind of production mode. In addition, when the special control is performed, the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed so that it is impossible to specify whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled, and whether the special transition control is performed or the normal transition is performed. Depending on whether control is performed, before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the time before determination until the display result of the identification information for presentation is derived and displayed is determined at a different rate. And, when special control is performed, the mode of the effect is controlled according to at least whether the normal gaming state or the special gaming state is controlled and the pre-decision time. The length can increase the player's expectation for the special gaming state. Since the combination of such an effect mode and the pre-determination time can increase the player's expectation for the special game state, the player's interest can be directed to the stop time of the effect identification information. it can. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the production mode can be identified. Further, for the player, recognizing the length of the pre-confirmation time is difficult to recognize compared to, for example, recognizing that the advance notice of entering the special gaming state has been made. As a result, it is difficult to be sure whether or not the player is controlled to the special gaming state based on the length of time before the determination, so in the mode of the effect after the special control, the player It is possible to always have an interest in whether or not the game state is special.

  (3) The presentation mode control means is controlled to the special gaming state when the special control is performed, and the pre-determination time is a predetermined first pre-determination time (5 seconds). The second mode time (6) is controlled to the first mode (mode A) at a high rate, controlled to the special gaming state, and the time before determination is different from the first time before determination (6). The mode of the effect is controlled to a second mode (mode B) different from the first mode at a high rate in accordance with the second).

  According to such a configuration, when the special control is performed, the production mode is the first mode when the pre-confirmation time is the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time. Since the ratio of the ratio controlled to the special gaming state differs between the case of being controlled to the second mode and the case of being controlled to the second mode, the player's interest can be further directed to the time before the decision. it can.

(4) The presentation control means sets the pre-establishment time to at least a first pre-confirmation time (5 seconds), a second pre-confirmation time (6 seconds) longer than the first pre-confirmation time, and the second confirmation Decide to one of the 3rd pre-determined time (13 seconds) longer than the previous time,
To make it difficult for the player to distinguish the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time compared to the time difference (7 seconds) between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time, The time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time is determined to be smaller (1 second) than the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time (the time difference of 1 second is Compared with the time difference of 7 seconds, it is difficult for players to recognize).

  According to such a configuration, the player can hardly distinguish the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time compared to the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time. The time difference between the time before 1 decision and the time before 2nd decision is set smaller than the time difference between the time before 2nd decision and the time before 3rd decision. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the time difference in the length of the pre-decision time, so it is difficult to be sure whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state based on the length of the pre-decision time, When the common performance mode is set, it is possible to have more interest in whether or not the game is in the special game state.

  (5) The effect mode control means further controls the mode of the effect according to a variation mode (stop patterns 1 to 3 in FIG. 53) of the effect identification information when the special control is performed ( In FIGS. 53A and 53B, when a stop time of 5 seconds or 6 seconds with a high rate of probability change is selected, the stop pattern 2 or stop pattern 3 is selected with a high rate. Depending on the stop pattern, the promotion mode may be controlled differently depending on the stop pattern.

  According to such a configuration, since the mode of the effect is controlled according to the variation mode of the effect identification information when the special control is performed, the degree of expectation that the special game state is controlled is suggested. There will be plenty of variations in production, which can further enhance the fun of the game.

(6) The production mode control means includes:
It is a mode in which the degree of expectation that it is controlled to the special gaming state is high, and it is controlled by one of a plurality of types of high expectation modes that are different from each other in the degree of expectation that it is controlled to the special gaming state. When a predetermined fall condition is satisfied (when the fall transition from mode A, B, or C to mode N is determined in the mode transition determination in S640 of FIG. 50), A fall control means (S654 in FIG. 55) for controlling the mode of the effect to the normal mode (mode N) in which the degree of expectation is controlled to the special gaming state than the mode;
When the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied after being controlled to the normal mode by the fall control means (re-promotion transition from mode N to mode A, B, or C in the mode transition determination of S640 in FIG. 50) And a promotion control means (S659, S660 in FIG. 55) for controlling the mode of the effect in the high expectation mode when the determination is made)
The promotion control means is the high expectation mode that was controlled before being controlled to the normal mode by the fall control means, or the expectation that the special gaming state is controlled more than the high expectation mode. The mode of the effect is controlled to a high expectation degree mode having a higher degree (when the effect mode determined to be re-promoted by S640 has a higher expectation level than the effect mode before the transition to fall, the effect mode determined to be promoted to shift by S659 When the effect mode determined to be re-promoted by S640 is lower in expectation than the effect mode before the fall transition, the effect mode before the fall is shifted to S660.

  According to such a configuration, the fall from the high expectation mode to the normal mode occurs when the fall condition is satisfied, but the promotion control may be performed again to the high expectation mode when a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. Thereby, even after falling from the high expectation mode to the normal mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of being controlled again to the high expectation mode, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, after the fall from the high expectation mode to the normal mode, when the control is promoted to the high expectation mode again, the high expectation mode that was controlled before the normal mode was controlled, or the expectation It is controlled to the high expectation degree mode in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the special gaming state is higher than the degree mode. Thus, the fact that the player has fallen from the high expectation mode to the normal mode once does not reduce the player's sense of expectation, and can prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

(7) When the predetermined fall condition is established when the effect mode control means is controlled in the high expectation mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the special gaming state is high (FIG. 50) When the transition from mode A, B, or C to mode N is determined in the mode transition determination of S640), the expectation controlled to the special gaming state is lower than the high expectation mode. The mode (mode N) includes a fall control means (S546 in FIG. 47) for controlling the production mode.
The production control means includes
Execution number counting means (variation number counting function of the microcomputer 100 for effect control) for counting the number of execution times of the variation display of the special identification information after the effect mode control means has controlled to the high expectation mode;
When the high expectation mode is controlled, the suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (strong effect or weak effect) that suggests that the falling condition is satisfied (effect control micro) Computer 100, S606 and S607 in FIG. 60;
When the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means, a high-probability suggestion effect (strong effect) with a high probability that the fall condition is satisfied after the suggestion effect is executed, and the fall condition is Suggestion effect selection means (production control microcomputer 100, FIG. 60) for selecting an suggestion effect from a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a low probability suggestion effect (weak effect) whose probability of establishment is lower than the high probability suggestion effect. S611, S612),
Suggestion effect execution means (the effect control microcomputer 100, S160 to S162 in FIG. 45) for executing the suggestion effect selected by the identification information effect selection means during the variation display of the effect identification information,
The suggestion effect selection means selects the high-probability suggestion effect at a higher rate when the number of executions counted by the execution number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (see FIG. 59A). , (B), when the number of changes is 100 times or more, the ratio of selecting the strong effect is set higher than when the number of changes is less than 100).

  According to such a configuration, among the suggested effects that suggest that the falling condition is satisfied if the number of executions of the variation display of the special identification information after being controlled to the high expectation mode is a predetermined number or more, Since the high probability suggestion effect with a high probability that the condition is satisfied is executed at a higher rate than when the number of executions of the variable display is less than the predetermined number of times, the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state is low Between the player's experience (recognition) and actual control (the content of the suggestion effect executed with high probability) can be eliminated, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(8) When the predetermined fall condition is satisfied when the production mode control means is controlled in the high expectation mode in which the expectation that the special game state is controlled is high (in FIG. 50) When the transition from mode A, B, or C to mode N is determined in the mode transition determination of S640), the expectation controlled to the special gaming state is lower than the high expectation mode. The mode (mode N) includes a fall control means (S546 in FIG. 47) for controlling the production mode.
The production control means includes
Execution number counting means for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the special identification information after the common effect mode control means is controlled to the high expectation mode (variation number counting function of the effect control microcomputer 100);
When the high expectation mode is controlled, the suggestion effect determining means (the effect control microcomputer 100, S606 in FIG. 60) determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect that suggests that the fall condition is satisfied. , S607, S611, S612),
When the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means, the suggestion effect execution means (the effect control microcomputer 100, FIG. 45) that executes the suggestion effect during the variation display of the effect identification information. S160 to S162,
When the number of executions counted by the execution number counting unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (100 times), the suggestion effect determination unit is higher in proportion than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined number (100 times). When the number of changes is less than 100, the second mode transition effect determination table of FIG. 58 (B) selected in step S607 in FIG. In addition to the first mode transition effect determination table of FIG. 58 (A) selected in S606 of FIG. 60, the mode including the strong effect and the weak effect is set by setting a higher ratio for mode transition effect determination. High percentage of execution of transition effects).

  According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable identification special information display after the control in the high expectation mode is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the suggestion effect that suggests that the fall condition is satisfied is displayed in the variable display. Will be executed at a higher rate than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined number of times, so the player's experience (recognition) that the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state is low and actual control (high (The suggestion effect is executed with probability) can be eliminated, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of production mode. It is a display screen diagram showing a display example of the effect mode in the effect display device. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a transition of the production mode in latent mode. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of transfer of re-promotion of the production mode in latent mode. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a main board (game control board). It is a block diagram showing circuit configuration examples such as an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted in the main board | substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach fluctuation | variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a symbol fluctuation | variation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a timing chart which compares and shows the operation | movement of the symbol in the change display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows the stop time table used in order to select the symbol stop time in the fluctuation | variation display when it becomes latent mode. The figure which shows the data selection table before latent used for making the decision regarding the transition of the production mode before going into the latent mode, and the data selection table during the latent used for making the decision concerning the transition of the production mode during the latent mode. It is. It is a figure which shows a 1st selection table-a 3rd selection table. It is a figure which shows a 4th selection table-a 6th selection table. It is a figure which shows a 7th selection table-a 9th selection table. It is a figure which shows a 10th selection table-a 12th selection table. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a timing chart showing an example of the transmission operation of the effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a transition production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st mode transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd mode transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure which shows the stop pattern table by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd mode transfer setting process by 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fall promotion setting process. It is a figure which shows a re-elevation expectation degree table. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an example of a mode transition effect. It is a figure which shows the mode transition effect determination table by 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fade-out background selection table by 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition effect setting process by 4th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game ball by driving it into the gaming area, and based on the winning of the gaming ball in the starting area provided in the gaming area. Any gaming machine provided with special display means for performing variable display of special identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, and a variable winning ball apparatus that changes to a state advantageous to the player Also good.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming machine frame (base frame) 2 and a gaming board (gauge board) 6 that is supported and fixed by the gaming machine frame 2 to form a gaming board surface. Has been. The game board 6 has a substantially circular game area 7 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 7, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided on the lower surface of the gaming machine frame 2, and an excess ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided below the hitting ball supply tray 3. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 is provided which is operated by the player to fire the hit ball. The game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the gaming machine frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body.

  A first special symbol display 8a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (lower left of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1), and a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 8b is provided on the lower right side of the region 7. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are each composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 8a is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol indicator 8b is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”, for example. Good.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has a decorative symbol display area for performing variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram. In other words, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying decorative symbols that are identification information for three decorations (for production) “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Among the symbol display areas, there are symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The positions of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, as the display areas to be the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, three areas may be provided to be bonded or separated, or to be able to be bonded and separated. The display operation in the effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special figure, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special diagram is executed on the special symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variation display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. . The number of symbol display areas for variably displaying decorative symbols is not limited to three. For example, two, four, or nine may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any arrangement may be used.

  On the right side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided. The top effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are, for example, effects in which a related display effect is executed in each re-variation period (including the first variation period) during one variation period. ) Blinks when a predetermined production operation such as) is executed. A movable member 78 is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates. For example, the movable member 78 operates when a re-variation effect or the like is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c. The lighting operation of the upper production LED 85a, the middle production LED 85b, and the lower production LED 85c, and the movement operation of the movable member 78 may cause the special symbol variation display result to be “big hit”, and the decorative symbol variation display mode may be It may operate when a notice effect or the like for notifying that there is a possibility of “reach” is executed.

  Below the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal winning ball device that forms a first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13. The normal winning ball apparatus is composed of a predetermined ball receiving member, for example, and always keeps the first start winning opening 13 in a certain open state. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Below the ordinary winning ball apparatus, an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 that forms a second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is provided. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed by a solenoid 16 into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position. ing. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15, when the solenoid 16 is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole 14. . On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 16 is in the on state, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning hole 14. Become. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening 14 even when in the normal open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. May be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 15 may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port 14 by, for example, closing the second starting winning port 14 in the normally open state. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 13a. At this time, if the first reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that entered the first start winning opening 13 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol display 8 a A first start condition (also referred to as “first execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using one special figure is established. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 14a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 13a and the prize ball to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 14a. May be the same number or different numbers. At this time, if the second reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that entered the second start winning opening 14 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display 8b A second start condition (also referred to as “second execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using two special figures is established.

  Here, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started first is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state, etc. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). In this embodiment, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided below the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, when the solenoid 21 is in the off state, the opening / closing plate closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the open / close plate opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 21 is on. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected by the count switch 23. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, there is provided a first attached symbol display 9a for performing a variable display of the first attached symbol serving as identification information for decoration (for production) different from the decorative symbol. In the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second attached symbol display 9b for performing a variable display of the second attached symbol serving as identification information for decoration (production) different from the decorative symbol. For example, each of the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b may be composed of two LEDs. In the first attached symbol display 9a, during the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first attached symbol is performed. In the second attached symbol display unit 9b, during the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b, the variation display of the second attached symbol is performed. The display operation in the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (on the right side of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1). The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”). Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”). For example, the normal symbol display 10 only needs to perform normal symbol variation display by alternately lighting decorative lamps (or LEDs) indicating “◯” and “×”. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the numbers indicating "0" to "9" A plurality of types of normal symbols including symbols indicating “−” may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 may variably display the normal symbols by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order.

  On the side of the first attached symbol display 9a, a first special symbol reserved memory that displays the first reserved memory number that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is identifiable. A display 18a is provided. On the side of the second attached symbol display 9b, a second special symbol reserved memory that displays the second reserved memory number that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 is identifiable. A display 18b is provided. For example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may be a display composed of four decorative lamps (or LEDs). In the first special symbol storage memory display 18a, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is increased by 1 each time a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the first start condition is satisfied, The number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by 1 each time the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 8a is started. Further, in the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, every time a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 and the second start condition is satisfied, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is increased by one. Thus, every time the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by one.

  The display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a total reserved memory display unit 18c that displays the total reserved memory number, which is an added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, in an identifiable manner. By displaying the total reserved memory number so as to be identifiable by the total reserved memory display unit 18c, it is possible to easily grasp the number of execution conditions (total number) that the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied. Note that the total reserved memory display unit 18c may not be provided as long as the first special symbol reserved memory indicator 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory indicator 18b are provided.

  On the upper part of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 is provided. For example, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 is a display composed of four decoration lamps (or LEDs), and displays the number of normal figure hold memories as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate 32. Here, when a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a, a normal game by the normal symbol display 10 will be used if the number of stored universal symbols is less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The normal chart start condition for executing is established. If the general chart start condition for starting the general chart game is not satisfied due to the fact that the normal chart start condition is satisfied but the previously started general chart game is being executed, etc. Occurs. At this time, the number of stored common symbols is incremented by 1, and the number of lamps (or LEDs) lit by the normal symbol stored memory display 41 is increased by one. On the other hand, each time the normal symbol change display by the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of the normal symbol reserved memory is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the lamp (or LED) which is turned on by the normal symbol reserved memory display 41. Decrease the number of.

  A windmill and a number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided on the surface of the game board 6 in the game area 7. At predetermined positions in the game area 7 on the game board 6, winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 serving as general winning holes are provided. For example, each winning port 29, 30, 33, 39 may be any one that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The game balls that have won the winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 are detected by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a provided corresponding to the respective winning holes. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 on the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part are provided outlets 26 through which the hit balls that have not been won are taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  An operation unit 38 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 3. For example, the operation unit 38 may include a plurality of operation units such as a jog button that can be pressed and a jog dial that can be rotated. Note that the operation unit 38 is not limited to a unit that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a unit that can perform a contact operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel, or may be tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation unit 38, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation unit 38 may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation unit 38 is detected by the operation detection switch 38a. The operation detection switch 38a may be configured to include a plurality of detectors in order to detect a player's operation mode with respect to a plurality of operation units included in the operation unit 38 in an identifiable manner.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7.

  When the game ball entering the game area 7 passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform a variable display in the normal game, for example, the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display. For example, the fluctuation display result of a normal symbol is “per regular symbol”. On the other hand, if the upper lamp is turned on at the end of the fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 10, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “normal figure loss”. When the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display 10 is “per normal symbol”, the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is tilt-controlled for a predetermined number of times, and the second start winning opening is obtained. 14 is in an expanded open state. In other words, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 changes the second start winning opening 14 from the normal open state, which is disadvantageous to the player, to the extended open state, which is advantageous to the player, when the normal symbol variation display result is “per normal”. Let

  If the game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is in a state in which the variable display of the first special figure can be started (for example, a special symbol). The first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the first attached symbol display 9a The variation display of the first attached symbol is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special figure, the first attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on the winning at the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special figure cannot be started, the first special figure is used by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  If the game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, it is in a state where the variable display of the second special view can be started (for example, a special symbol). The second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second attached symbol display unit 9b The variation display of the second attached symbol is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special figure, the second attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special figure cannot be started, the second special figure is used by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9, the display color is changed from left to right in order from a variable display game such as a special figure game in which the first start condition and the second start condition are established first. A plurality of display parts are provided. As an example, when the first start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is displayed in blue. To change. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally not displayed is changed to red display. Thereafter, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. The total reserved memory display unit 18c is not limited to display the total reserved memory number so that the total reserved memory number can be specified by changing the display color. The total reserved memory number can be specified by displaying the number of predetermined characters or displaying numbers. May be displayed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, after the special symbol variation display is started, when a predetermined time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variation display result of the special symbol The confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . Further, after the change display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to a small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “2” are small hit symbols, A symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 8a is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 8b. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are rounded 15 times. The jackpot symbol is a special symbol indicating the numbers “1” and “5”, and the symbol is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (15 round big hit game state) as the first specific game state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the opening / closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 6 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby playing the special variable prize winning ball device 20 as a game. One round is completed by changing to a closed state, which is a second state that is disadvantageous to the user. In the 15 round big hit gaming state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15-round big hit game state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit gaming state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set in each round. A second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit gaming state It becomes. Further, in the 2-round jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first number in the 15-round jackpot gaming state. In the two round big hit game state, at least one of the period in which the grand prize opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit gaming state. A game in the 2-round jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds executed is “2” is also referred to as a twice-open game as a special control. In the two-round big hit gaming state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player. You may make it change and to make it return to a 2nd state, after a predetermined period (1st period or 2nd period) passes.

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol that indicates the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the game state is over, as one of the special game states, the special display state and the decorative symbol variation display time is shortened compared to the normal state (also referred to as “low probability low base state”) (“low” Also referred to as “highly accurate base state”. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state ends when one of the conditions is satisfied first, among a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game being executed and the fluctuation display result being “big hit”, Good. In addition, after the 15 round jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round jackpot symbols has been stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it will not be in the short-time state. Alternatively, the normal state may be obtained. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is , 15R non-probable big hit symbol (also called 15R normal special figure).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol that indicates the number of “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the gaming state is over, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the variation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation control (probability variation is continued). Control) is controlled to a first probability variation state (also referred to as a “high probability high base state”) as a high probability gaming state. In a high-probability gaming state such as the first probability variation state, in the variation display of each special figure game or decoration pattern, the probability that the variation display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than the normal state. Also improve to be higher. In this embodiment, such a high-probability gaming state is continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game. On the other hand, after entering the high-probability gaming state, any one of the conditions that the special-number game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the variation display result is “big hit” is You may make it complete | finish, when it establishes previously. In addition, even when a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in a high-probability gaming state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, a predetermined ratio is set when the special figure game is started. The high probability gaming state may end. Alternatively, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without changing the display result to “big hit” after the first certain change state, the change display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is normally set. While returning to the variation display time similar to the state, the probability variation control may be continuously performed. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a 15R probability variation big hit symbol (also called a 15R probability variation special figure).

  2 round big hits based on special symbols showing numbers of “1” and “5” which are 2 round big hit symbols being stopped and displayed as final special symbols in the special figure game After the gaming state ends, the normal state is controlled. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round jackpot symbol controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not 2R. It is called a probable big hit symbol (also called 2R normal special symbol).

  Two round big hits based on the special symbol showing the numbers "1" and "5" that become the two round big hit symbols being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game among the special symbols showing the number "5" After the gaming state is over, as a special gaming state different from the short-time state or the first certain variation state, for example, while the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is the same as the normal state, the probability variation control ( Control to shift to the second probability variation state (also referred to as “high probability low base state”) as a high probability gaming state in which probability variation control is performed is performed. Like the special symbol indicating the number “5”, the two round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called 2R probability variation big hit symbol (also called 2R probability variation special figure).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit gaming state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two-round big hit gaming state, the period during which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation for opening the big prize opening is the second. Control may be made so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and control is performed to maintain (continue) the gaming state before the change display result is “small hit”. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached the predetermined number when the special figure game whose variation display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit game state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit game state. When the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit gaming state is changed to the first state, even in the small hit gaming state, In the same manner, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the first certain change state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 10 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. The control for improving the probability that the fluctuation display result of “per normal figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the fluctuation display result becomes “per normal figure”. The second is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 such as control for making the tilt control time for tilt control longer than in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. In the first certain change state and the short time state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 in the first certain change state or the short time state and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high release control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded opening state is increased more than when the high opening control is not performed. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period is the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the first certain change state or the short-time state. That's fine.

  In this embodiment, in the second probability variation state, control is performed for determining the normal fluctuation time and the tilt control time at a different determination rate than in the normal state. In this way, it is recognized to some extent whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the average usual figure variation time and tilt control time in a plurality of ordinary figure games. Can do. It should be noted that, in the second probability variation state, control may be performed in which the normal time fluctuation time and the tilt control time are determined at a time different from that in the normal state. In this case, it is possible to recognize whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the normal fluctuation time and the tilt control time more reliably than when only the determination ratio is changed.

  The change display of the attached symbols by the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Anything is acceptable. Here, the variation display of the first accessory symbol by the first accessory symbol display 9a is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. The variation display of the second attached symbol by the second accessory symbol display 9b is synchronized with the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that reminds that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” on the first attached symbol display 9a. Remains lit. When the big special symbol or the small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side reminding that the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” on the second attached symbol display 9b. Remains lit.

  As an example of the display result reminiscent of the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” in the attached symbol, it is sufficient if the upper LED is lit. On the other hand, as a display result of an attached symbol reminiscent of the fact that the fluctuation display result is “losing”, it is sufficient that the lower LED is lit. In the attached symbol, the display result reminiscent of the variable display result being “big hit” may be different from the display result reminiscent of the variable display result being “small hit”. . As an example, recall that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” when the upper LED is lit, while the fluctuation display result is “small hit” when both the upper and lower LEDs are lit. You may be reminded of something. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the function of the 1st attached symbol display 9a and the 2nd attached symbol display 9b with the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. In other words, the first attached symbol and the second attached symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  One of the special figure games using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. Corresponding to the change of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the effect display device 9 (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). Is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game, the decoration is displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the result of symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively.

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals “1” or “8”) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, 8 character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other decorative graphic. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  During the variation of the decorative symbols, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, the symbols are sequentially flowed from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest. When such a scroll display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, the “left” symbol display area 9L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the smallest decorative symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed. The direction in which the scroll display is performed is not limited to the direction from the upper side to the lower side, for example, the horizontal direction from the right side to the left side, the left side to the right side, or the direction from the lower side to the upper side. There may be.

  In the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbols to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R The symbol display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state refers to a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 forms a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). The display state in which the variation continues or the display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R) is predetermined. The remaining symbol display area (for example, “medium” symbol display area 9C) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Etc.), the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or the decorative symbols are all or a part of the jackpot combination in all or part of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right”. It is the display state which is fluctuating synchronously while configuring the part.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by changing the display mode of the background image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach state may be executed. Such an effect operation such as a display of a character image, a change in the display mode of a background image, and a change in a variation pattern of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the frame LED 28, etc. May be included in different modes of operation. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability”).

  During the decorative display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach production, it is possible that the decorative display of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A variable display effect may be executed for notifying the player in accordance with a variable display mode of a symbol or the like. In this embodiment, whether or not to perform each effect operation is determined in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 31 side. The variable display effect in this embodiment may be any change in the special figure change time depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. For example, when the variable display effect is executed, the variable symbol display time (special symbol change time) may be longer than that when the variable display effect is not executed.

  In the variable display effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the special symbol variable display is stopped. At the same time, control is performed to finally stop the decorative symbols in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation variation display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by a short stop. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  Unlike decorative reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative designs, for example, display of effect images such as predetermined character images and message images, etc. Notifying the player that the decorative display may be in a reach state and the display result may be a “hit” due to a different display operation than the variable display operation. A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is that the variation display state of the decorative symbol is reached after the decorative symbol variation display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the state. Further, the notice effect that informs that the variation display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variation display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variation display state will not reach the reach state after the decorative symbol variation display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative pattern variation display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreachless loss”) variation display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the variation display state of the decorative symbol being reached after the decorative symbol variation display is started Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative pattern variation display result is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a 15R non-probable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be determined in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol change display state Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the symbol pattern that is displayed variably in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9 is “1”, for example. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right” Any symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be displayed that are stopped on the predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a 15R non-probable variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “15R uncertain change” (also referred to as “15R normal”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the fluctuation display result is “big hit” by the fluctuation display mode of “15R uncertain change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the 15R probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the final special symbol in the special symbol game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol change display state is In response to reaching the reach state, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. After that, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol number that is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be displayed that are stopped on the predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a 15R probability variable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative symbol variation display mode in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variable big hit combination is stopped and displayed is: This is referred to as a “15R probability variation” variation display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) when the variation display result is “big hit”.

  When the 15R probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variation big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special game, it is included in the variation display mode of “15R probability variation”. . Thus, after the fluctuation display result is “big hit” by the fluctuation display mode of “15R probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the first probability changed state. It will be.

  When the special symbol indicating “1” or “5”, which becomes a big hit symbol for two rounds, is stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special game, or a special symbol indicating “2”, which is a small hit symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variation display state does not reach the reach state, for example, “1, 3, 5”, “3, 5, 7”, “5, 7, 1”, or , “7, 1, 3”, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of determined decorative symbols predetermined as a second opening chance is stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is the 2R non-probable big hit symbol, the variation display mode of the decorative symbols in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a big hit type) of “2R non-probable change” (also referred to as “2R normal big hit or sudden normal big hit”) when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. In response to the special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is the 2R probability variable big hit symbol, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable display. This is referred to as a variation display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “2R probability change” (also referred to as “sudden probability change big hit”) when the result is “big hit”.

  In addition, when a special symbol that becomes a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variation display state has reached the reach state, After a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when a special symbol that is a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol change display state does not become the reach state, and the chance to open twice You may make it the fixed decoration symbol used as the predetermined non-reach combination different from eyes stop-display.

  Thus, after the fluctuation display result is “big hit” by the fluctuation display mode of “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”, the game is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state, and when the two round big hit gaming state ends, If it is “non-probability change”, it is controlled to the normal state, while if it is “2R probability change”, it is controlled to the second probability change state. After the variable display result becomes “small hit”, the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continued after the variable winning operation is performed under the control of the small hit gaming state. However, if it is determined that the special game state is to be ended in response to the special figure game in which the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, the normal state is controlled after the small hit game state is ended. .

  When the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R probability change”, or when the variation display result is “small hit”, 2 There are times when the performance before opening is performed. In the effect before opening twice, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to being controlled to a two-round big hit game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the effect before the opening twice is not limited to the effect operation that is performed during the change display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, even in part or all of the period of the two round big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, It may include an effect operation that is continuously executed during the variable display. When the pre-opening effect is started, the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner may be erased, and after the pre-opening effect is executed twice, the final decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment includes a plurality of effect modes with different effect modes in the effect display device 9 and the like. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a transition example of the effect mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, six effect modes, mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, and mode N, are provided. These effect modes are used when a predetermined effect mode switching condition is established, such as when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is finished, and when the decorative symbol variation display is started in the latent mode described later. It is changed by switching according to the current production mode, jackpot type, and the like. That the production mode is switched (changed) from one mode to another mode is the same as the production mode transitioning from one mode to another mode. In addition, in order to enhance a production effect, production modes other than these may be provided.

  Here, the latent mode will be described. In the latent mode, when the 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, after the corresponding hit gaming state is finished, the production mode is changed between the probability changed state and the non-probable changed state (normal state). This is an effect control mode for controlling to an effect state in which the probability variation state is hidden by making it impossible to specify which of the two is controlled. Here, it is impossible to specify that the display mode of the 9 effect modes in the effect display device is common between the probability change state and the non-probability change state, and thus whether or not the display mode of the effect display device 9 is in the probability change state is specified. It is impossible, and it can be specified whether or not the display device (display device such as the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the state display LED, etc.) other than the effect display device 9 is in a certain change state. It includes cases where there are cases and cases where it cannot be specified. In other words, as described above, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is the same (opened twice) in the 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, so in the control pattern of the winning game state, It is because it cannot recognize which hit it is. The 2R probability variable big hit, the 2R non-probable big hit, and the small hit are hits in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 20 is extremely short and it is difficult to win the special variable winning ball device 20. Therefore, as a special control that makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 the opening time extremely short and makes it difficult to win the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, it is the same opening time as the winning game state or an opening shorter than the opening time. High speed opening control that opens (opens / closes) the big prize opening 15 times in time may be executed in place of these hits, instead of 15R high-speed positive variation big hit, 15R high-speed non-probable big hit, and 15R high-speed small hit. . In that case, if the 15R high-speed probable big hit, 15R high-speed non-probable big hit, and 15R high-speed small hit are made, the release pattern will be the same (15 times high-speed open), The latent mode is incapable of specifying whether the state is controlled to the non-probable change state (normal state).

  Specifically, in the latent mode, the effect mode is controlled to one of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N. In the latent mode, the effect mode is controlled so that the expectation level that is the probability variation state has a magnitude relationship of mode C> mode A, mode B> mode N. In mode A and mode B, as will be described later, the production mode is controlled so that the magnitude relationship of the expected level, which is a probable change state, changes according to the production conditions. In this way, in the latent mode, control is made to one of a plurality of types of effect modes such as modes A to C and N that have different expectations for being controlled in the probability variation state. Here, the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation with respect to being controlled to the probability variation state can be determined by, for example, the ratio (probability) controlled to the probability variation state in the latent mode.

  In the case of this embodiment, the mode C is selected only when it is in the probability variation state. Further, each of the mode A, the mode B, and the mode N can be selected in any state of the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state. Therefore, when the production mode is mode C, the player can recognize that the probability variation state is deterministic, and the player's expectation for the probability variation state can be enhanced. Mode N is also selected in a production mode other than the latent mode (normal production mode). Therefore, when the production mode becomes mode N in the latent mode, it is possible to upset the player's expectation for the probability variation state.

  Note that the mode C may be selected in either the state of the probability variation state or the state of the non-probability variation state, and the expected degree of the probability variation state is as follows: Mode C> Mode A, Mode B Any production mode may be used. Further, the mode N may be used only in the latent mode, as long as the expectation degree that is the probability variation state is an effect mode in which mode A, mode B> mode N.

  In the example shown in FIG. 2, when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change”, the mode K effect mode is set after the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit gaming state) ends. That is, during the mode K effect mode, the first certain change state is established. In the effect mode of mode K, for example, an effect image notifying that the game state is a high probability game state such as “probability changing” is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and / or on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The player may be able to recognize the high-probability gaming state by changing the display mode of the background image and the decorative pattern from the display mode in the other effect modes. When the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the mode J effect mode is set after the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit gaming state) ends. Then, when the mode J is the production mode, if the variable display result is not “big hit” and the time-short state is completed, the mode N production mode is set. In other words, the mode J is short during the mode J production mode. In the effect mode of mode J, for example, an effect image informing that the time is in a short state, such as “short time”, is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and / or a background image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize that the time is short by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern and the display mode in other effect modes.

  When the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change” or “2R non-probability change”, the mode A effect mode is set after the big hit gaming state (two round big hit gaming state) is completed. In addition, when the variation display result is “small hit”, the mode A effect mode is set after the small hit gaming state ends. As described above, during the mode A effect mode, the player may be in the second probability variation state based on the “2R probability variation” jackpot type, or may be in the normal state based on the “2R non-probability” jackpot type. In other cases, the normal state, the short-time state, the first probability variation state, and the second probability variation state may be set based on the fluctuation display result of “small hit”.

  In the latent mode, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, if mode A, mode B, mode C, or mode N is selected, the mode change is performed by changing the production mode to another mode. It is determined whether or not to do so. When it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed when the mode A is the production mode, the production mode is changed to any one of mode B, mode C, and mode N. When it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed when the mode B is the production mode, the production mode is changed to any one of mode A, mode C, and mode N. When it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed when the mode C is the production mode, the production mode is changed to any one of mode A, mode B, and mode N. When it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed when the mode N is the production mode, the production mode is changed to any one of mode A, mode B, and mode C.

  As described above, when the mode is any of the mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N, the gaming state is any of the normal state, the short time state, the first probability variation state, and the second probability variation state. possible.

  When in any of the production modes of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N, control is performed when the latent mode is controlled to a predetermined special game state in which probability variation control such as the second probability variation state is performed. It becomes impossible to specify whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state by becoming a common effect mode when not being played. Even if the plurality of effect modes include an effect mode that can recognize that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special gaming state, such as the mode J or the mode K effect mode, for example. Alternatively, for example, only the effect modes in which it is impossible to specify that the game state is controlled to the special game state, such as the effect modes of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N, may be included.

  Next, display examples of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N on the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 3 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of the effect mode in the effect display device 9. In FIG. 3, the display of decorative symbols is omitted.

  In mode N, as shown in FIG. 3A, a background image N showing a city is displayed. In mode A, a background image A showing the sea is displayed as shown in FIG. In mode B, a background image B showing a mountain is displayed as shown in FIG. In mode C, a background image C showing the sky is displayed as shown in FIG. Thus, the background image is different for each effect mode, so that the player can recognize the type of effect mode based on the background image in the latent mode.

  Since modes A, B, and C are performance modes that are selected only in the latent mode, when the background images A, B, and C are displayed, the player can reliably recognize that the mode is the latent mode. Since the mode N is selected even in a normal performance mode other than the latent mode, the player may not be able to recognize the latent mode. In order to enable the player to recognize the mode N in the latent mode, in the latent mode, it is possible to identify the latent mode by displaying a predetermined character in each of the background images A to C and N. An image may be displayed.

  FIG. 4 is a display screen diagram showing a transition example of the effect mode in the latent mode. In FIG. 4, the display of decorative symbols is omitted. For example, in the case of mode N, if 2R probable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to shift from N to a selected production mode such as mode A.

  When the display mode is the latent mode, the transition to the presentation mode is performed every time the variable display is executed. For example, the transition from the mode A to the mode C as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4C, the transition from the mode C to the mode B to the mode B can be performed and the transition to the rendering mode selected according to the transition determination can be made after the end of the variable display. .

  Further, when in the latent mode, for example, mode A displayed only in the latent mode after the end of the variable display, as in the transition of the effect mode from mode B to mode N in FIG. 4D. , B, or C, the mode N may be displayed when the mode is other than the latent mode. Mode N is a mode that is selected even in a normal performance mode other than the latent mode, and the ratio of the probability variation state in the latent mode is very low (expectation of the probability variation state) as compared with each of modes A, B, and C. The transition from the mode A, B, or C to the mode N is called a fall transition. Control that performs such a fall transition is called fall control.

  Further, when the display mode is the latent mode, any one of modes N, A, B, and C after the completion of the variable display, for example, the transition of the effect mode from mode N to mode A as shown in FIG. There is a case to move to. Each of modes A, B, and C is a mode that is selected only in the latent mode, and has a higher ratio of the probability variation state in the latent mode than the mode N (higher expectation rating in the probability variation state). This is an effect mode, and such transition from mode N to modes A, B, and C is called promotion transition. Control that performs such promotion transition is called promotion control.

  FIG. 5 is a display screen diagram showing a transition example of re-promotion of the production mode in the latent mode. In FIG. 5, the display of the decorative design is omitted. Referring to FIG. 5, in the latent mode, for example, as shown in (A) to (B), after the production mode once falls from mode A, B, or C to mode N, for example, (B) To (C), when the production mode is promoted to the mode A, B, or C from the mode N, the mode may return to the mode A, B, or C again. When such a production is promoted and transitioned after falling, it is called re-elevated transition. Control that performs such re-elevation transition is called re-elevation control. The promotion transition destination in the re-promotion transition may be the same effect mode as before the fall, or may be an effect mode different from the effect mode before the fall.

  In addition, it has been described that the transition from the mode A, B, or C to the mode N is referred to as a fall transition. However, in addition to such a relationship, the rendering mode has a high expectation rating in a probable state. The transition to a production mode with a low rating from the above may be called a fall transition. For example, transition from mode to C mode A or B may be referred to as falling transition. Also, regarding modes A and B, when mode A has a higher expectation for the probability variation state, the transition from mode A to mode B may be referred to as a fall transition, and mode B is likely to transition to the probability variation state. Transitioning from mode B to mode A when the degree of expectation is high may be referred to as falling transition.

  In addition, the transition from the mode N to any of the modes A, B, and C has been described as promotion transition. However, in addition to such a relationship, the stage with a low expectation degree rating Transitioning from a mode to a production mode with a high rating may be referred to as promotion transition. For example, transition from mode A or mode B to mode C may be referred to as promotion transition. In addition, regarding modes A and B, when mode A has a lower expectation for the probability variation state, transition from mode A to mode B may be referred to as a promotion transition, and mode B is likely to proceed to the probability variation state. Transitioning from mode B to mode A when the degree of expectation is low may be referred to as promotion transition.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a main board (game control board) and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board (game control board) 31, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 as shown in FIG. Has been. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 77 and the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80. In addition, various substrates such as a power supply substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, and the like may be disposed on the back surface of the game board 6 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 31 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board comprising a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 80 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 31 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 10 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 10 is performed. It also has a function to control. The main board 31 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560. An output circuit 59 for transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 16 and 21 is mounted.

  The effect control board 80 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 31, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77, receives the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the decoration. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering including the LED 25 and the frame LED 28 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 80 includes all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 9, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 27, and all or part of the on / off operation in the light emitter such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. The function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation is provided.

  The sound output board 70 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and is used to output sound from the speaker 27 based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 80. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp driver board 35 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and a light emitter such as a decoration LED 25 and a frame LED 28 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A lamp driver circuit for performing on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the main board 31 receives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a. The transmission wiring is connected. It should be noted that the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are game media such as what are called sensors. As long as it has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a gaming ball as In addition to the wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10 and the like, the main board 31 includes the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, Wiring etc. which transmit the command signal for performing display control of special symbol reservation memory indicator 18a, the 2nd special symbol reservation memory indicator 18b, normal symbol reservation memory indicator 41, etc. are connected. In addition, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is mounted on the main board 31. May be.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 31 toward the effect control board 80 is relayed by the relay board 77. The main board 31 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 77, for example, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 560, for example, as shown in FIG. The included output port 571 is connected. The output buffer circuit included in the output port 571 can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77, and the signal input from the relay board 77 to the main board 31 is possible. To prevent. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 or the relay board 77 side to the main board 31 side.

  For example, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 as shown in FIG. 7 may be provided on the relay board 77 for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit 74 includes a diode having an anode connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 31 and a cathode connected to an effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 80, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit 74 can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 side to the main board 21 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 77, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 560 and the main board side connector in the main board 31. By providing the output port 571 including the illegitimate signal input from the outside to the main board 31 can be prevented.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the display operation of the effect image on the effect display device 9, a sound control command used to control sound output from the speaker 27, a decoration LED 25, and a frame. A lamp control command used for controlling a lighting operation or the like in a light emitter such as the LED 28 is included. FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 8A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. The command 81XXH is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern of a variation display image such as a decorative symbol composed of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, it is configured such that the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to start variation and the designated content of the variation pattern can be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command for specifying a change display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is In the case of “big hit”, the variation display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol is “15R uncertain change”, “15R uncertain change”, “2R uncertain change”, or “2R probability change”. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first change display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result that the change display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “2R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variation display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the variation display result indicated by the variation display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variation display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variation display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, in a case where the variation pattern and the variation display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variation display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the effect control command for designating the variation pattern and the effect control command for notifying the variation display result are prepared separately, the number of the effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns and the variation display result The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating the stop of the decorative symbol display in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 (C), the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to whether it is a normal state, a short time state, a first or a second certain change state, and the like. Different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is a normal state. The command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state. Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is the first certain change state. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is the second certain change state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command that designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big winning opening is open in the big hit gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A2XXH is a command for designating display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period when the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. It is a specified command. In the special command during opening of the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of rounds executed in the 15 round big hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”), Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, the continuous presentation operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command and the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determining result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit game state and / or small hit game state, a part or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the winning end designation command May not be transmitted, and the rendering operation may be executed in the two round big hit gaming state and / or in the small hit gaming state according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The command B001H is used to execute a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H executes a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for satisfying is satisfied.

  The command C0XXH is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number so that the total reserved memory number can be specified in the total reserved memory display unit 18c provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is a value. For example, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition being satisfied, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) in the hold data in the first special figure hold storage section 151A and the second special figure hold storage section 151B shown in FIG. Different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved memory number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer. As shown in FIG. 6, for example, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like. 54, a random access memory (RAM) 55 that provides a work area for game control, a central processing unit (CPU) 56 that performs a control operation according to a program, an input / output port (I / O) 57, and a CPU 56 And a random number circuit 503 for updating numerical data indicating a random value independently.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 56 executing a program read from the ROM 54. At this time, the CPU 56 reads fixed data from the ROM 54, fixed data read operation, the CPU 56 writes various variation data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores it, and the CPU 56 stores various variation data temporarily stored in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57, and the game control microcomputer 560 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the device is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 560 only needs to include the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 57 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In the main board 31, for example, the random number circuit 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining a reach 2. The numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently from the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503, and the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, MR5. The numerical data indicating the value may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 56. Further, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 560, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, “15R non-probable change”, “2R non-prob. , “2R probability variation”, a random number value used for determination, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random number value used for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variation display state is set to the reach state when the variation display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR3 is in a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 10 is “per-normal” or “unusual”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “201”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter through the second start winning port 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball device 15 based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open). The state is used to determine whether or not to change from a state) to a state in which a game ball easily enters (expanded open state).

  Of the variation patterns of decorative symbols in this embodiment, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” is referred to as a loss variation pattern. The loss variation pattern includes a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variation display mode is “non-reach” (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and a decorative symbol variation display mode of “reach”. A reach variation pattern corresponding to a certain case (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”) is included.

  As non-reach variation patterns, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, variation pattern PB1-2, variation pattern PC1-1, and variation pattern PC1-2 are provided. Further, as the reach variation pattern, a variation pattern PA2-1, a variation pattern PA2-2, a variation pattern PA3-1 to a variation pattern PA3-8 are provided.

  Further, hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” include variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PA5-1 to variation pattern PA5-3, variation pattern PA6-1. A variation pattern PA6-5 is provided. In addition, if the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R accurate change”, or if the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, Patterns PF1-1 to PF1-6 are provided.

  In the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, after the pre-opening effect is finished twice, the confirmed decorative symbol is derived and displayed and stopped. On the other hand, in some or all of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4, the pre-release effect may be performed twice after the second chance of release is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the pre-opening effect is executed twice, the display of the decorative design may be erased, and the fixed decorative design may not be derived and displayed.

  FIG. 10 shows the variation pattern types of decorative symbols in this embodiment. All of the above-described loss variation pattern and hit variation pattern are included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variation display of decorative symbols.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3, the variation pattern types CA1-3 and the variation pattern types correspond to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”. CB1-1, variation pattern type CB1-2, variation pattern type CC1-1, variation pattern type CC1-2 are provided. In addition, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are provided as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “reach”.

  Variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-3 are provided as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain variation” or “15R certain variation”. Yes. In addition, if the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”, or if the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, the fluctuation pattern type is Type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 are provided. In addition, variation pattern types CA4-4 to CA4-6 are provided as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R uncertain variation” or “2R probability variation”. , Provided. Each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns along the respective contents. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation of “no shortening (normal state / second probability variation state)” in which the variation display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol is not shortened in the normal state or the second certain variation state. It is a pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (normal state / second certain variation state)”. Fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 is a “pending” that reduces the display time of fluctuation of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memory is “3” or “4” in the normal state or the second certain variation state. The variation pattern type of “3, 4 shortened (normal state / second probability variation state)” includes a variation pattern previously associated with “hold 3, 4 shortened (normal state / second certain variation state)”. Yes. In the variation pattern type CA1-3, the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is any of “5” to “8” in the normal state or the second certain variation state. Fluctuation pattern type of “hold 5-8 shortened (normal state / second probability variation state)”, and variation pattern previously associated with “hold 5-8 shortening (normal state / second probability variation state)” Is included.

  In the variation pattern type CB1-1, in the first certain variation state, the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, but the variation based on the total number of reserved storage is not performed. The variation pattern type of “probability variation state” ”includes a variation pattern previously associated with“ no shortening (first probability variation state) ”. In the variation pattern type CB1-2, in the first certain variation state, the variation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8”. It is a variation pattern type of “shortening (first probability variation state)”, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “reserved 2-8 shortening (first probability variation state)”.

  In the variation pattern type CC1-1, while the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the normal state in the shortened state, the shortening based on the total number of reserved storage is not performed. The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (short time state)”. The variation pattern type CC1-2 shortens the variation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8” in the time-saving state “reduction of 2-8 reservations” The variation pattern type is “(short time state)”, and includes a variation pattern associated with “reserved 2 to 8 shortened (short time state)” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing)” in which a normal reach effect (normal reach) is performed after the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variation display result is “losing”. And includes a reach fluctuation pattern associated with “normal reach (losing)” in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-2 executes a reach effect predetermined as a super reach α among a plurality of types of super reach after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variation display result is “losing”. The variation pattern type of “super reach α (losing)” includes a reach variation pattern previously associated with “super reach α (losing)”. In the variation pattern type CA2-3, when the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the super reach β is different from the super reach α among the plural types of super reach β. As a variation pattern type of “super reach β (losing)” that executes a predetermined reach effect, and includes a reach variation pattern previously associated with “super reach β (losing)”. Compared to normal reach production such as normal reach, the reach production that becomes super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is more likely (reliability) that the variable display result will be a “hit” after the reach production appears. .

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach production (normal reach) is executed, and then the definite ornament combination of the big hit combination is performed. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit)” to be derived and displayed, and includes a hit variation pattern associated with “normal reach (big hit)” in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the reach effect of the super reach α is executed, and then the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived. The variation pattern type of “super reach α (big hit)” to be displayed includes a hit variation pattern associated with “super reach α (big hit)” in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-3, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the reach production of the super reach β is executed, and then the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived. It is a variation pattern type of “super reach β (big hit)” to be displayed, and includes a hit variation pattern previously associated with “super reach β (big hit)”.

  In the variation pattern type CA4-1, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the second chances of opening is stopped and displayed without changing the variation display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the normal state or the second certain variation state. This is a variation pattern type of “chance stop (normal state / second probability variation state)”, and includes a hit variation pattern previously associated with “second chance release stop (normal state / second certain variation state)”. . In the variation pattern type CA4-2, in the first probability variation state, the decoration pattern that is one of the second chances of opening is stopped and displayed without changing the variation display state of the ornaments in the reach state. The variation pattern type of “(first probability variation state)” includes a hit variation pattern that is associated in advance with “second chance release stop (first probability variation state)”. In the variation pattern type CA4-3, in the short time state, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the second chances of opening is stopped and displayed without stopping the variation display state of the decorative symbols in the reach state. State) ”, and includes a hit variation pattern associated with“ 2nd chance to stop open (short-time state) ”in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA4-4 executes a reach effect such as super reach α after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the normal state or the second certain variation state, and from the reach effect to the effect before opening twice. This is a variation pattern type of “reach loss at the time of opening twice (normal state / second probability change state)” in which the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the combination of reach loss is shifted and displayed, and “reach loss at the time of opening twice (normal state / second) The probability variation state) ”is included in advance and the hit variation pattern is included. The variation pattern type CA4-5 performs reach production such as super reach α after setting the variation display state of the decoration symbol in the reach state in the first certain variation state, and shifts from the reach production to the production before opening twice. This is a variation pattern type of “reach lose at the time of opening twice (first probability change state)” in which the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and is previously associated with “reach loss at the time of double release (first probability change state)”. Includes hit variation pattern. Fluctuation pattern type CA4-6 performs reach production such as super reach α after setting the decorative display state of the decorative symbol to reach state in the short time state, and shifts from the reach production to the production before opening twice to reach loss combination This is a variation pattern type of “reach loss before opening twice (short-time state)” in which a fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and includes a variation pattern of hits previously associated with “reach loss before opening twice (short-time state)”. It is out.

  As described above, in the setting example of the variation pattern type shown in FIG. 10, first, the variation pattern type is classified into the non-reach variation pattern, the reach variation pattern, and the hit variation pattern. In addition, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, the variation display time corresponding to the normal state, the second certain variation state, the first certain variation state, or the short-time state, or the total number of reserved memories. Variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-3, variation pattern type CB1-1, variation pattern type CB1- so that one or more variation patterns classified according to whether they are shortened or the like are included. 2, each of the variation pattern type CC1-1 and the variation pattern type CC1-2 is set. In addition, in the case of a reach variation pattern, whether the reach production is normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, whether or not the variation display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed, etc. Each of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 is set so that one or more variation patterns classified according to the above are included. Further, in the case of a hit fluctuation pattern, whether the fluctuation display result corresponds to “big hit” or “small hit”, or whether the big hit type corresponds to “2R non-probability” or “2R probability change”. No, one or more fluctuations classified according to whether the reach production is normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, or whether the fluctuation display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed, etc. Each of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 and the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-6 is set so that the pattern is included.

  Note that the configuration of the variation pattern type is not limited to that shown in FIG. 10, and may be any configuration in which each variation pattern is classified based on an arbitrary effect operation performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31, and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data and the like constituting the table are stored.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the symbol display result determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, as the symbol display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 11A, a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. An ordinary map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 11 (C) is provided.

  The first special figure display result determination table 130A is a big hit with the fluctuation display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B displays the fluctuation display before the definite special symbol that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state with the result as “big hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The general chart display result determination table 130 </ b> C has the second start prize as the “variable display result” as the “variable display result” before the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result in the general game on the normal symbol display 10 is derived and displayed. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to perform tilt control that makes the mouth 14 easily enter the game ball based on the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short-time state, the first probability variation state, or the second probability variation state. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to any of the fluctuation display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 8a or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 8b. Accordingly, determination tables having different determination value assignments for the variable display results are prepared. On the other hand, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may use a common determination table to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Thereby, the data capacity memorize | stored in ROM54 can be reduced. Further, the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B may have different assignments of determination values to the “small hit” variation display result. As an example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the number of determination values assigned to the “small hit” variable display result may be smaller than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. . With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, compared to the special figure game using the first special figure, the probability that the change display result is “small hit” is reduced, and the first special figure game is performed. It is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest due to the occurrence of a delay in the game in the probabilistic state or the short time state.

  In the general map display result determination table 130C, the map display result determination table 130C is used for determining the general map display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a first certain variation state, a short time variation state, or a second certain variation state. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to a part of “usual map # 1” to “# 4 per usual map” and each of the usual map display results of “usual figure losing”. The base map display result determination table 130C sets the base map change time to one of a plurality of types corresponding to each of “base map # 1” to “base map # 4” and “base map lose”. Setting start data or when the random value MR5 matches the determined value assigned to any of the usual map display results of “# 1 per common map” to “# 4 per common map”. 14 may include setting data and the like for setting the time (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) for tilt control to make the game ball 14 easy to enter.

  In the setting of the general chart display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 11C, the random value MR5 for determining the general chart display result is “1” corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. When it is any one of ˜ “60”, it is determined that the result of the “standard map display” is “per standard map”. On the other hand, when the game state is the first certain change state or the short-time state, when the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result is any one of “1” to “180”, It is determined that the result will be a normal display result of “winning”. As a result, the probability that the variation display result in the normal game is “per normal map” is higher in the first probability variation state or the short time state than in the normal state or the second probability variation state. It is possible to increase the frequency with which tilt control is performed to make the start winning opening 14 enter a state in which a game ball can easily enter.

  In addition, when the game state is the first probability change state or the short time state, the normal map change time is “1 second” regardless of whether the normal map display result is “per normal map” or “normal map lose”, and the game state is the normal state. Or shorter than in the second probability variation state. As a result, when the first certain change state or the short time state is established, the execution time of the usual game is shorter than when the normal state or the second certain change state, and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14. It is possible to increase the frequency at which tilt control is performed to make it easy. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first probability variation state or the short time state, the opening time and the number of times of opening are “1.7 seconds × 3 times”, which is longer than when the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. Opened many times. Thereby, when it is in the 1st probability change state or the time-short state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second probability change state.

  In addition, in the setting of the general chart display result determination table 130C, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the general charts from “1 per normal map” to “3 per general map” are displayed. Assignment of decision values to display results is different. In the setting example shown in FIG. 11C, when the game state is the normal state, if the random number MR5 for determining the general chart display result is any one of “1” to “6”, “# 1 per common chart” When the game state is the second probability variation state, if the random number MR5 is any one of “1” to “30”, the “figure # 1” The display result is determined. As a result, the probability of being determined to be a normal map display result of “# 1 per normal map” is higher in the second probability variation state than in the normal state. In addition, in the setting example shown in FIG. 11C, when the game state is the normal state, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal display result is any one of “7” to “18”. On the other hand, when the game state is the second probability variation state, the random number MR5 is any one of “31” to “54”, and “# 2 per map” is determined. Is determined as the normal map display result. As a result, the probability of being determined to be a normal map display result of “# 2 per normal map” is higher in the second probability variation state than in the normal state.

  And if it is determined to be one of the general map display results of “# 1 per common map” to “# 3 per general map”, the normal map change time, open time, The combination of opening times is different. For example, if it is determined that the map display result is “# 2 per map”, the time fluctuation of the map will be “5 seconds” and the map will be “# 1 per map” or “# 3 per map”. It becomes shorter than “10 seconds”, which is the normal map change time when determined as a figure display result. In addition, when it is determined that the map display result is “# 1 per map”, the combination of the release time and the number of times of release is “1.5 seconds × 2 times”, and “# 2 per map” or “ It is released many times in a longer time than “0.3 seconds × 2 times”, which is a combination of the opening time and the number of times of opening when it is determined as the usual figure display result of “# 3 per common figure”.

  Whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the combination of the normal figure change time, the opening time, and the number of times of opening when the normal figure display result is “per normal figure” is set by the setting of the general figure display result determination table 130C. It can be recognized to some extent whether or not the state is surely changed. In the setting example of FIG. 11 (C), the second probability variation state is higher than the normal state because the probability of being determined as the universal map display result of “# 1 per common map” is high. The time and number of releases (tilting control time) are likely to be many times in a long time, and the probability of being determined as a result of the normal map display of “# 2 per normal map” is high, so the normal map change time is short. Is likely. Depending on whether it is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination ratio of the combination of the normal map change time, the open time, and the number of open times when the normal map display result is “per normal map” is varied. On the other hand, the possibility that the game ball may enter the second start winning opening 14 may be set to be the same regardless of whether the game ball is in the normal state or the second certain variation state. For example, in the second certain variation state than in the normal state, the probability of being determined as the normal map display result of “# 1 per common map” is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening (tilting control time) ) Increases the possibility of multiple times over a long period of time, while lowering the probability that the normal map change time will be shortened by lowering the probability of being determined as the “# 2 per map” By doing so, the ease of entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 is almost the same in both the normal state and the second certain variation state (compared to the short time state and the first certain variation state). You may make it become. In addition, depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination ratio of the base map change time when the base map display result is “base plan losing” may be varied. .

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131 displays a decoration based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is “big hit” and it is determined to control the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “15R uncertain variation”, “15R uncertain variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, and “2R certain variation”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit types of “15R non-probable”, “15R probable”, “2R non-probable”, and “2R probable”. It has been. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is executed, and the second special symbol indicator 8b sets the second special symbol indicator 8b. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is a result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot gaming state or to control to the two round jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state After ending, the data for determination corresponds to the determination result of whether or not to control to the high probability gaming state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the jackpot type of “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change” corresponds to the determination result that the game state is controlled to the 15 round jackpot game state, while “2R uncertain change”. Alternatively, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “2R probability variation” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the game state is controlled to the two-round jackpot gaming state. Further, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the big hit type of “15R non-probability” or “2R non-probability” corresponds to the determination result that the control state is not set to the high probability gaming state, while “15R probability change”. Or the table data which shows the decision value allocated to the big hit classification of "2R probability variation" has shown the decision result that it controls to a high probability gaming state. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (the jackpot type buffer value) to a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, “0” to “3”). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the big hit type of “15R non-probable change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “1” to “36” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation When the buffer value is “2”, a determined value in the range of “1” to “44” is assigned. For the big hit type of “15R probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, a determined value in the range of “45” to “98” is assigned. For the big hit type of “2R non-probable change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “80” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, no decision value is assigned. For the big hit type of “2R probability variation”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “81” to “100” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, determination values “99” and “100” are assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 12, the variation display result is set to “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to set the gaming state to the normal state after controlling the big hit type to “2R uncertain change” to the two round big hit gaming state. In addition, when it is determined to control the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, the big hit type is set to “2R probability change” at a lower decision ratio than when the first start condition is established, and the control is set to the two round big hit gaming state. Later, it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the second probability variation state. As a result, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 in the first certain variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “2R non-probability variation” and almost no award ball is obtained and the normal state is obtained. It can be prevented that the game is controlled, and the big hit type is “2R probability variation”, so that the prize ball is hardly obtained and is controlled to the second probability variation state.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the reach determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C are provided as reach determination tables.

  The reach determination tables 132A to 132C indicate whether or not to change the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when it is determined (preliminarily determined) that the variation display result is “lost”. -2 is a table referred to for determination based on -2. Each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a second probability variation state, a first probability variation state, or a time reduction state. In each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C, numerical values (determination values) compared with the reach determination random value MR2-2 are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, and non-reach HB1. -2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination result not reach, and reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Assigned to the decision result.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 13A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” corresponds to the non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2”, Allocated to reach HA1-3.

  Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “3” or “4”, “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. The determination value in the range is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, “1” to “1”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A determination value in the range of “233” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories, which is the number of reserved special game, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”), the decorative symbol variation display state is changed as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the decision to reach the reach state is made is low. If the average special symbol variation time in the non-reach variation pattern is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the reach variation pattern, the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. In some cases, the variation time of the average special symbol can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the big hit variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C are provided as jackpot variation pattern type determination tables. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” (pre-determined). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short-time state. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A is selected when in the normal state or the second likelihood variation state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is selected when in the first certain variation state, and the big hit variation pattern type when in the short time state. The decision table 133C is selected.

  In each jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A to 133C, the variation pattern depends on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “15R uncertain variation”, “15R uncertain variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, or “2R certain variation”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for type determination is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 and variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-6. It has been. In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the multiple types of big hit types is determined. ing. For example, in the variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 14A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the second probability variation state, whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability variation” or “ Depending on whether it is “15R probability variation”, the allocation of the decision values to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 is different.

  Thus, the allocation of the decision value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types. Note that the determined value may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. For example, in the case of the big hit type of “15R uncertain change”, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1, while in the case of the big hit type of “15R probability change”, the variation pattern type CA3-1. The decision value may not be assigned to. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result as to whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types.

  When the big hit type is “2R non-probable” or “2R probable”, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable” or “15R probable” such as variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-6. The decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the decision value is not assigned. Thus, in the case of controlling to the 2 round big hit gaming state according to the fluctuation display result “big hit” and the big hit type being “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”, it is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit gaming state. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  When the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 14A used when the gaming state is the normal state or the second positive change state, and the first positive change state The big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 14B used at a certain time and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. The assignment of the decision value to −1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 is different. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “15R non-probable change”, “15R non-probable change”, “2R non-probable change”, or “2R probable change”, the big hit change pattern type selected according to the gaming state Determination table 133A (selected when in normal state or second probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B (selected when in first probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C (selected when in short time state) When the game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be different. In this manner, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Note that the determined value may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. For example, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 in the normal state or the second probable state, while in the first probable state or the short time state If there is, the determined value may not be assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states. Also, depending on whether it is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination value may be assigned to different variation pattern types, or the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type may be different. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to recognize to some extent whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the difference in the determined variation pattern type, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  14 (A) to 14 (C), the variation pattern type selected at the time of 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, and small hit is selected as follows depending on whether or not the probability variation state occurs. The ratio is different. In the variation pattern types CA4-1, CA4-2, and CA4-3, the ratio selected when the second certainty variation state is entered is smaller than the ratio selected when the second certain variation state is not achieved. In the variation pattern types CA4-4, CA4-5, and CA4-6, the proportion selected when the probability variation state is reached is larger than the proportion selected when the probability variation state is not achieved.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 stored in the ROM 54. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 has a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined (preliminarily determined) that the variation display result is “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, it is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time variation state. A numerical value (determined value) is assigned to one of the fluctuation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3.

  In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 14A is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state. In the type determination table 133A, a part of the determination value is assigned according to the case where the big hit type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the big hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 14B is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-2 to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the first certain variation state. In 133B, a part of the determined value is assigned in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the change pattern type CA4-3, to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the short-time state, is assigned to the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. A part of the determined value is assigned according to the case where the big hit type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”. As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 includes a case where the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change” and a case where the change display result is “small hit”. , Common variation pattern types. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “2R non-probable change” or “2R probable change” in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 are common. Are set so as to be included.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of the reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are provided as reach variation pattern type determination tables. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variation display state of the decorative symbol is determined to be the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state. That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected when it is in the normal state or the second probability variation state, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected when it is in the first probability variation state, and the reach variation pattern type when it is in the short time state. The decision table 135C is selected.

  Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C uses one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C to reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach. It may be selected as a use table depending on whether or not the decision to enter the reach state such as HC2-1 has been made. That is, when the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 13A is used to determine one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a use table. When the reach HB2-1 is determined using the reach determination table 132B shown in FIG. 13B, the reach variation pattern determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach determination table 132C shown in FIG. When the reach HC2-1 is determined, the reach variation pattern determination table 135C may be selected as the use table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, depending on whether the determination result indicating the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the pattern type are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-3.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A, depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3 is the determination result for reaching the reach state, the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, corresponding to the determination result of reach HA 2-1, a value (determined value) in the range of “1” to “190” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA 2-1, and other values are allocated to the variation pattern type CA 2-2. ~ Allocated to the variation pattern type CA2-3. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “195” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-2. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “215” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-3. The reach HA 2-1 is determined by the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 13A to be compared with the reach determination random number value MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value has been assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation pattern type CA2− in which the normal reach effect (normal reach) is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio determined to 1 becomes high. And, the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the normal reach is set to be shorter than the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the super reach. If this is the case, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of a non-reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C are provided as non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative symbol variation display state is not the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected when in the normal state or the second probability variation state, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected when in the first certain variation state, and the non-reach variation state when in the time reduction state. The variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected.

  The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include, for example, non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. The use table may be selected according to which of the determination results for not reaching the reach state. That is, when the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5 are determined, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as the use table, and the non-reach HB 1-1 and non-reach HB 1-2 are selected. If determined to be either, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and if determined to be either non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2, the non-reach variation pattern type The determination table 136C may be selected as the usage table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-. 1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a variation pattern type CA1-1, variation pattern type CA1-. 2, it is assigned to any one of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1, the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2, the fluctuation pattern type CC1-1, and the fluctuation pattern type CC1-2.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the hit variation pattern determination table 137 stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination table 137, when it is determined (predetermined) that the variation display result is “big hit”, the random variation value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. In the winning variation pattern determination table 137, a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “big hit” according to the variation pattern type is the large display It is assigned to a pattern (big hit variation pattern).

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table 138 stored in the ROM 54. The loss variation pattern determination table 138 is used for determining a variation pattern according to whether or not to reach a reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variation display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR4. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost” or It is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  The RAM 55 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 55 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 20 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes.

  FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game control data holding area. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which a game ball wins a first start winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus and the first start condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (the special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 503 and the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening 13. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are reserved data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is characterized in that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second start condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the second start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening 14. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are reserved data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 a game ball has won, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151 </ b> C stores “first” start data indicating a winning at the first start winning opening 13 or “second” start data indicating a winning at the second starting winning opening 14. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of the game balls.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol indicator 8a, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the like. In S15 of FIG. 33 or the special symbol process shown in FIG. 34, which is executed for the control, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The normal symbol process flag indicates which process to select and execute in the normal symbol process shown in S16 of FIG. 33 or FIG. 42 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10. I will tell you.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variation display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game. The small hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (preliminary determination) that the variation display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the high probability gaming state such as the first probability variation state or the second probability variation state, while the high probability gaming state is ended. It is cleared in response to, etc., and is turned off. The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state or the first probability change state, while the time reduction state or the first probability change state is ended. Correspondingly cleared and turned off. In this way, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified from the state of the probability variation flag and the hourly flag. That is, if both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, the gaming state is a normal state. If the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the gaming state is a time reduction state. If both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are on, the gaming state is the first probability change state. If the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off, the gaming state is the second certain variation state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special symbol fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The usual figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the usual figure game such as a normal symbol fluctuation display time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) in the usual figure game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 503 separately from the random number circuit 503 or a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game. This is for the CPU 56 to use the data and count so as to be updatable by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, and MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 56 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 503, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 503. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 13a is on. belongs to. For example, every time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 13a is on, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening 13 is normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the first start winning signal is determined to be off or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 14a is on. belongs to. For example, every time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 14a is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 has been normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) according to the increase or decrease of the second reserved memory number. Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total pending memory count is stored in the total pending memory count counter as the total pending memory count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction in response to an increase or decrease in the total pending memory count) )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special figure game ends. When the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, thereby controlling the end of the time reduction state and the transition to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating the initial count value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 54 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating which of the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port has been detected. As an example, “1” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port 13. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 14.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” corresponding to the completion of the special figure game.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 12, if the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is set to “15R probable change”. ”Is set to“ 1 ”for the jackpot type buffer value,“ 2 ”is set to the jackpot type buffer value if the jackpot type is“ 2R uncertain change ”, and the jackpot type is“ 2R probability change ”. For example, “3” is set to the big hit type buffer value.

  The I / O 57 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. And an output port for transmission.

  For example, an effect control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 7 is mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 receives an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77, and the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display the attached symbols in a variable manner. Display control in the symbol display 9b, display control in the effect display device 9 that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the like are performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs lighting control of the decoration LED 25 provided on the gaming board 6 and lighting control of the frame LED 28 provided on the gaming machine frame 2 via the lamp driver board 35. In addition, the sound output control in the speaker 27 is performed via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to include a production control CPU 101, a RAM that stores information related to the production, and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. The RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 may not be backed up by the power source. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) built in or external to the effect control microcomputer 100, and is input via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to a capture signal (effect control INT signal) from the board 31. In the following, the ROM built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is also referred to as effect control ROM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for temporarily storing (developing) image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The input port 107 mounted on the effect control board 80 is connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation detection switch 38a. The operation detection signal input to the input port 107 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process for producing a game effect such as a notice effect based on the operation detection signal from the operation detection switch 38a.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Any unidirectional circuit may be used as the restricting means. An effect control command or the like input to the input driver 102 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 103.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, vibration motors 87 a, 87 b, 87 c that are provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85 a, the middle effect LED 85 b, and the lower effect LED 85 c and vibrate the mounting portion of each LED are driven via the output port 106. Here, the vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a, the vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the side of the gaming machine frame 2 such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board 6 side. In addition, as the light emitting means, a status display LED (lamp) that indicates a gaming state such as whether or not a special gaming state such as a probability change state is indicated by a light emitting state, and the drive control is performed by the lamp driver board 35. May be.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The audio data ROM 704 stores audio data corresponding to the sound number data. The sound data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuation period). The voice synthesizing IC 703 reads voice data for generating a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data from the voice data ROM 704, temporarily stores (decompresses) the voice data in a predetermined voice RAM or the like, and then corresponds to the voice data. The generated audio signal (analog audio signal) is output to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27.

  In the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the production operation is updated by a built-in or external random number circuit (not shown) or the like. Count as possible.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 3, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random values SR2 for determining the symbol stop time, The numerical data indicating each of the random number SR3 for determining the effect mode is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The random number circuit built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100 may be any circuit that counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the number may be counted. Alternatively, the entire random number value is obtained by executing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process by using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, numerical data indicating a part may be updated. Further, if the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 may use a random counter to count numerical data indicating all random number values.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are the result of variable display of the ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”Are random numbers used to determine the decorative symbols derived from the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (the final symbols for the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol). Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the decorative symbol variation display ends. A decorative pattern. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random number value SR2 for determining the symbol stop time is a random number value used for determining the symbol stop time as the time from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the final stop, and “1” to “101”. Takes a range value. The random number SR3 for determining the effect mode is a random value used for determining the effect mode, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “201”.

  In addition to the effect control program, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the effect control ROM built in or externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, the effect control ROM stores a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the control pattern table, and the like. .

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control pattern table. The production control ROM incorporated in or external to the production control microcomputer 100 corresponds to a plurality of production modes such as mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, and mode N, as shown in FIG. Table data constituting the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F as shown in FIG.

  The effect control ROM stores table data constituting a mode transition effect control pattern table 181 as shown in FIG. 22B, various effect control pattern tables 182 as shown in FIG. Has been. The mode transition effect control pattern table 181 includes a mode transition effect that is executed in association with mode transition such as mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, and mode N. It is only necessary that a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various types of effect control are stored as mode transition effect control patterns (illustration is an example). In the various effect control pattern table 182, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period of control in the big hit game state or the small hit game state as various effect control patterns. . The various effect control pattern tables 182 are included in each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F corresponding to the effect modes of mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, and mode N. It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to vary the contents of the rendering operation in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state depending on which of the plurality of types of presentation modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. it can.

  In each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F shown in FIG. Accordingly, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various performance operations having different performance modes. For example, each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F includes a symbol variation control pattern table 185 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the symbol variation control pattern table. In the symbol variation control pattern table 185, corresponding to a plurality of variation patterns or the like, an effect display device in a period from the start of the variation display of the ornament symbol until the finalized symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control content of various effect operations, such as a decorative symbol display operation in a variable display effect such as a decorative symbol variable display operation on the nine display screens. In addition, each production | presentation control pattern table 180A-180F is good also as an address management table which manages the memory | storage address of the pattern data which comprises multiple types of production control patterns. In this case, in the effect control ROM, table data constituting each effect control pattern table 180A to 180F is stored in a predetermined storage area, and a pattern constituting each effect control pattern in a different area from this storage area. Data only needs to be stored.

  In the symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 185 and the announcement effect control pattern stored in the announcement effect control pattern table 186, the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of modes A, B, and modes. Regardless of whether the mode is C, mode J, mode K, or mode N, data indicating the control content of the common rendering operation may be included. In this case, for the data indicating the control content of the rendering operation common to each rendering mode, the common rendering control pattern table and the like provided separately from the rendering control pattern tables 180A to 180F corresponding to each rendering mode. It may be stored as a pattern. As an example, the control content of the rendering operation associated with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the period before the variation display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state is individual for each rendering mode, and each rendering control pattern table It is specified by the symbol variation control pattern stored in 180A to 180F. On the other hand, the control content of the rendering operation including the reach rendering after the decorative display variation display state reaches the reach state is common to each rendering mode, and the symbol variation stored in the common rendering control pattern table is stored. It may be specified by a control pattern.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control pattern. FIG. 24A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Mode transition effect control pattern stored in mode transition effect control pattern table 181, various effect control patterns stored in various effect control pattern table 182, symbol variation control pattern stored in symbol variation control pattern table 185, and notice effect Various effect control patterns such as the notice effect control pattern stored in the control pattern table 186 include, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, movable member control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, in the effect control pattern, for example, a period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation unit such as a jog button or a jog dial included in the operation unit 38, an operation for designating control contents of the effect operation when it is detected effectively, etc. Detection control data and the like may be included. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the operation execution time (effect time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 31, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 100. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, such as data indicating the change mode of each decorative symbol during the display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect or the like that is interlocked with the decorative symbol variation display operation during the decorative symbol variation display. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the movable member such as a movable member 78 connected to the motor 86, for example. That is, the movable member control data is data that designates a driving operation of the movable member. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 24B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. In the production control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink the light emitter in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and a mode specified by the movable member control data. Then, the control for operating the movable member 78 is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The production control CPU 101 in the production control microcomputer 100 sets the production control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting the variation display of the decorative design. Here, when setting the production control pattern, pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the production control ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control ROM in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the stored data in the effect control ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the decoration LED 25, and the frame according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitting body such as the LED 28 and the movable member such as the movable member 78 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the production control pattern set in this way is output from the production control microcomputer 100 to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, and the like. In the VDP 109 that has received a command from the effect control microcomputer 100, the image data indicated in the command is read from the CGROM and temporarily stored in the VRAM. In the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Expand.

  FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing a comparison of the behavior of symbols in the special symbol and decorative symbol variation display. The operations of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are controlled so that the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing are synchronized with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the variation display is started so that the variation start of the special symbol and the variation start of the decorative symbol are synchronized. Thereafter, for the decorative symbols, for example, the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are controlled to be temporarily stopped in the selected order such as the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Here, the first symbol is the symbol that temporarily stops, the second symbol is the symbol that temporarily stops after the first symbol, the third symbol is the symbol that temporarily stops after the second symbol, Any of the symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol can be the first to third symbols. Accordingly, the combination of the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol may be any combination of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  At the timing when the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the special symbol continues to display the variation after the start of variation, and control is performed for the three decorative symbols to display the fluctuation variation corresponding to the temporary stop state. Thereafter, control for final stop of the decorative symbol is performed so as to synchronize with the stop of the special symbol, and the display results of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are determined. Thus, the period during which the fluctuation variation is displayed is a period from the temporary stop to the final stop of all the decorative symbols, and is called the symbol stop time. Further, such a symbol stop time is a time before the symbol is temporarily stopped after the symbol is temporarily stopped, and is also referred to as a pre-decision time. After the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finally stopped, the next variation display can be executed. In addition, such symbol stop time (pre-decision time) can be defined as the time until the display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed before the display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed. This is the symbol stop time from the stop of the third symbol of all 25 decorative symbols to the stop of all symbols, and is determined based on the variation time of the special symbol. In the fluctuation display when the 2R non-probable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit or small hit becomes the latent mode, the symbol stop time is 5 seconds, 6 seconds before the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, Alternatively, it is determined to be 13 seconds ago. In the fluctuation display other than when 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, the symbol stop time is a fixed time according to each of the fluctuation pattern designation commands, for example, It is set to a time different from the symbol stop time when 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, such as 2 seconds. In the case of fluctuation display other than when 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, the symbol stop time is fixed uniformly, for example, 2 seconds, regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern designation command. It may be set to a predetermined time.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of symbol stop times to be selected are determined for the variable display when the latent mode is entered. The plurality of types of symbol stop times are selected at different selection ratios depending on whether or not the probability change state is entered, and the selected symbol stop times are used in the variable display. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the variation pattern when the latent mode is entered can be selected from the same variation pattern type for 2R probability variation big hit and for small hit or 2R non-probable big hit. By making the player indistinguishable, the display result of the decorative design is derived and displayed so that it is impossible to specify whether the player is controlled in the normal state or the probability variation state.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a stop time table used for selecting a symbol stop time in the variable display when the latent mode stored in the effect control ROM is set. FIG. 26 (A) shows a 2R probability change stop time table used when 2R probability change big hit, that is, when the probability change state is reached. FIG. 26B shows a 2R non-probable change / small hit stop time table used when 2R non-probable large hit or small hit, that is, when the probability change state does not occur.

  In the stop time tables of FIGS. 26A and 26B, 13 seconds for each variation pattern type of CA4-1 to CA4-6 selected when 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable variation big hit or small hit is reached. , 6 seconds, and 5 seconds, and the relationship between the numerical data of random SR2 for selecting each symbol stop time.

  In the 2R probability change stop time table of FIG. 26A, the selection ratio is set for each of the variation pattern types of CA4-1 to CA4-6 in a magnitude relationship of 5 seconds> 6 seconds> 13 seconds. Therefore, when the 2R probability variation big hit, 5 seconds is most easily selected as the symbol stop time. As a result, when the symbol stop time in the variable display before the opening game is performed twice is 5 seconds, the ratio of 2R probability variation big hit is high.

  Further, with respect to the variation pattern types CA4-4 to CA4-6, compared with the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3, the selection ratio is greater when the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit. Is set high. In the 2R probability change stop time table of FIG. 26A, a selection ratio of 5 seconds is set according to the magnitude relationship of CA4-4 to CA4-6> CA4-1 to CA4-3. Therefore, when the variation pattern types CA4-4 to CA4-6 that are easily selected when the 2R probability variation big hit is selected, 5 seconds is most easily selected as the symbol stop time. Thereby, when the variation pattern of the variation display before the opening game is performed twice belongs to any variation pattern type of CA4-4 to CA4-6, the variation pattern is any of CA4-1 to CA4-3. The rate at which the symbol stop time is 5 seconds is higher than when the sample belongs to the variation pattern type.

  In the 2R non-probable change / small hit stop time table of FIG. 26 (B), the selection ratio is 13 seconds> 6 seconds> 5 seconds with respect to each of the variation pattern types of CA4-1 to CA4-6. Is set. Therefore, when 2R non-probable big hit or small hit, 13 seconds is most easily selected as the symbol stop time. As a result, when the symbol stop time in the variable display before the opening game is performed twice is 13 seconds, the ratio of 2R non-probable large hit or small hit is high.

  In the 2R non-probable change / small hit stop time table of FIG. 26 (B), the selection ratio of 13 seconds is set according to the magnitude relationship of CA4-1 to CA4-3> CA4-4 to CA4-6. Yes. Therefore, when the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 that are likely to be selected when 2R non-probable large hit or small hit is selected, 13 seconds is most easily selected as the symbol stop time. Thereby, when the variation pattern of the variation display before the opening game is performed twice belongs to any variation pattern type of CA4-1 to CA4-3, the variation pattern is any one of CA4-4 to CA4-6. The rate at which the symbol stop time is 13 seconds is higher than when it belongs to the variation pattern type.

  Also, based on the comparison with the 2R probability change stop time table, when the 2R non-probable big hit or small hit is made, the symbol stop time is selected as 6 seconds rather than 5 seconds compared to when the 2R probability change big hit. Cheap. On the other hand, when 2R probability variation big hit is made, 5 seconds is more easily selected as the symbol stop time than 6 seconds, compared to when 2R non-probable big hit or small hit. As a result, when the symbol stop time in the variable display before the two open games is 5 seconds, the rate of 2R probability variation big hit is higher than the rate of 2R non-probable big hit or small hit, When the symbol stop time in the variation display before the open-release game is 6 seconds, the rate of 2R non-probable large hit or small hit is higher than the rate of 2R probable big hit.

  The symbol stop time is selected from a plurality of symbol stop times such as a first symbol stop time (5 seconds), a second symbol stop time (6 seconds), and a third symbol stop time (13 seconds). Compared to the time difference (7 seconds) between the second symbol stop time (6 seconds) and the third symbol stop time (13 seconds), the first symbol stop time (5 seconds) and the second symbol stop time (6 seconds) The time difference between the first symbol stop time (5 seconds) and the second symbol stop time (6 seconds) is the second symbol stop time (6 seconds). And a time difference (7 seconds) between the symbol stop time (13 seconds) and the third symbol stop time (1 second). Specifically, it is considered that the time difference of 1 second is harder for the player to recognize than the time difference of 7 seconds. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the time difference between the symbol stop times, so based on the length of the symbol stop time, it is difficult to be sure whether or not the player is controlled in the probabilistic state in the latent mode. When the latent mode is set, the user can be more interested in whether or not the state is the probability variation state.

FIG. 27 shows a pre-latency data selection table stored in the production control ROM and used for making a decision regarding the transition of the production mode before the latent mode is entered, and making a decision regarding the transition of the production mode during the latent mode. It is a figure which shows the in-latent data selection table used for this. FIG. 27A shows a pre-latency data selection table. FIG. 27B shows a latent data selection table.

  In the pre-latency data selection table of FIG. 27A, the relationship between the stored symbol stop time and the selection table used for determination regarding the transition of the effect mode is shown for each display result. In FIG. 27A, when the display result is other than 2R probability variation big hit (2R non-probability big hit, small hit), the selection table is determined as follows. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 13 seconds, the first selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 6 seconds, the second selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 5 seconds, the third selection table is selected.

  In FIG. 27A, when the display result is a 2R probability variation big hit, the selection table is determined as follows. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 13 seconds, the fourth selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 6 seconds, the fifth selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 5 seconds, the sixth selection table is selected.

  In the latent data selection table of FIG. 27 (B), the relationship between the stored symbol stop time and the selection table used for determination regarding the transition of the effect mode is shown for each display result. In FIG. 27 (B), when the display result is other than 2R probability variation big hit (2R non-probability big hit, small hit), the selection table is determined as follows. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 13 seconds, the seventh selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 6 seconds, the eighth selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 5 seconds, the ninth selection table is selected.

  In FIG. 27B, when the display result is the 2R probability variation big hit, the selection table is determined as follows. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 13 seconds, the tenth selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 6 seconds, the eleventh selection table is selected. When the symbol stop time stored at the start of fluctuation is 5 seconds, the twelfth selection table is selected.

  Next, the contents of the first selection table to the twelfth selection table determined to be used by the pre-latent data selection table and the in-latent data selection table will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the first to third selection tables described above stored in the effect control ROM. In each selection table, the relationship between the current production mode, the extracted random SR3 value, and the destination production mode is set.

  FIG. 28A shows a first selection table that is selected when the 2R non-probable big hit or the small hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 13 seconds. The current effect mode is an effect mode when a change display is executed before the latent mode, that is, 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit. The random SR3 is a random counter used to determine the transition destination of the production mode during the latent mode in the production control microcomputer 100 or a numerical value of “1” to “201”. Updated within the data range. The transition destination production mode is the transition destination of the production mode when the latent mode is started, or the transition destination of the production mode during the latent mode, and “no transition” is the current mode without the production mode transitioning. It is maintained.

  For example, when the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “1 to 5”, “no transition” is determined, and control is performed to maintain the rendering mode in mode N. . When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “6 to 180”, “mode A” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode A. Control is performed. When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “181 to 201”, “mode B” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode B. Control is performed.

  In the first selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode N.

  FIG. 28 (B) shows a second selection table that is selected when the 2R non-probable big hit or the small hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds. In the second selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode N.

  FIG. 28C shows a third selection table that is selected when the 2R non-probability large hit or small hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds. In the third selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A> mode N.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a fourth selection table to a sixth selection table. In each selection table, the relationship between the current production mode, the extracted random SR3 value, and the destination production mode is set. Since the 4th selection table to the 6th selection table are when the 2R probability variation big hit is made, the mode C that is shifted only when the probability variation state is entered is set as the current rendering mode and the transition destination rendering mode.

  FIG. 29A shows a fourth selection table that is selected when the 2R probability variation big hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 13 seconds.

  For example, when the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “1 to 3”, “no transition” is determined, and control is performed to maintain the rendering mode in mode N. . When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any of “4 to 170”, “mode A” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode A. Control is performed. When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “171 to 195”, “mode B” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode B. Control is performed. When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “196 to 201”, “mode C” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode C. Control is performed.

  In the fourth selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode C> mode N.

  FIG. 29B shows a fifth selection table which is selected when the 2R probability variation big hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds. In the fifth selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A, mode C> mode N.

  FIG. 29C shows a sixth selection table which is selected when the 2R probability variation big hit is made and the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds. In the sixth selection table, the selection ratio of the transfer destination mode (including no transfer) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode C> mode B> mode N.

  In the fourth selection table to the sixth selection table, since the mode C that is selected only when the probability change state is set as the transition destination production mode, when the production transition to the mode C is performed, The expectation of the player can be increased.

  When the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds, in the third selection table that is used when 2R uncertain large hit or small hit, the selection rate is higher in mode B than in mode A as the transition destination effect mode. On the other hand, in the sixth selection table used when the 2R probability variation big hit, the selection ratio is higher in mode A than in mode B as the transition destination effect mode.

  In addition, when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds, the mode A is selected as the transition destination effect mode than the mode B in the second selection table used when the 2R non-probable big hit or the small hit is made. On the other hand, in the fifth selection table used when the 2R probability variation big hit, the selection rate is higher in mode B than in mode A as the transition destination effect mode.

  Therefore, when mode A or mode B is determined as the effect mode when the latent mode is started, the symbol stop time in the variable display when the latent mode is set is 5 seconds or 6 seconds. Accordingly, the criterion for determining whether or not the ratio of the probability variation state is high in the latent mode is different. For example, when the symbol stop time in the variable display when the latent mode is set is 5 seconds, the probability change state is more when the production mode is mode A at the start of the latent mode than when mode B is. The ratio is high. On the other hand, when the symbol stop time in the variable display when the latent mode is set is 6 seconds, the probability change state is more when the effect mode is mode B at the start of the latent mode than when it is mode A. The ratio is high.

  As described above, the degree of expectation for the probability change state at the start of the latent mode varies depending on the combination of the symbol stop time in the variable display when the latent mode is entered and the effect mode at the start of the latent mode. Thereby, the player's expectation with respect to the probability variation state can be enhanced by the length of the symbol stop time. Since the combination of the kind of effect mode and the symbol stop time can increase the player's expectation for the probable change state, the player's interest can be directed to the stop time of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the effect mode can be identified. Furthermore, for the player, recognizing the length of the symbol stop time, such as 5 seconds or 6 seconds, is recognized as compared with, for example, recognizing that the advance notice that the state is likely to be changed is made. It is difficult. Thereby, since it is difficult to be sure whether the player is controlled to the special game state based on the length of the symbol stop time, when the mode becomes the mode A or the mode B. In addition, the player can be interested in whether or not the player is always in a probable state.

  FIG. 30 shows the seventh selection table to the ninth selection table stored in the effect control ROM. In each selection table, the relationship between the current production mode, the extracted random SR3 value, and the destination production mode is set.

  FIG. 30G shows a seventh selection table that is selected when the latent mode is in the non-probable change state and the stored symbol stop time is 13 seconds. For example, when the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “1 to 180”, “no transition” is determined and control is performed to maintain the rendering mode in mode N. . When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “181 to 195”, “mode A” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode A. Control is performed. When the current rendering mode is mode N and the extracted random SR3 is any one of “196 to 201”, “mode B” is determined as the transition destination rendering mode, and the rendering mode transitions to mode B. Control is performed.

  In the seventh selection table, when the current production mode is mode N, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode N> mode A> mode B. When the current effect mode is mode A, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode N. When the current rendering mode is mode B, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A> mode N.

  FIG. 30H shows an eighth selection table that is selected when the latent mode is in an uncertain change state and the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds. FIG. 30 (I) shows a ninth selection table that is selected when the latent mode is in an uncertain change state and the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds.

  In each of the eighth selection table and the ninth selection table, when the current production mode is mode N, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode N> mode A> mode B. ing.

  In each of the eighth selection table and the ninth selection table, when the current effect mode is mode A, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode N. ing. When the current production mode is mode B, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A> mode N.

  In the eighth selection table, the rate at which the transition destination is determined to be mode B when the current rendering mode is mode A is smaller than the proportion at which the transition destination is determined to be mode A when the current rendering mode is mode B. . The reason is that the current state is in a non-probable change state. Therefore, when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds and the ratio of the probabilistic state is large, the transition to mode B is large. This is because the consistency with the current uncertain change state deteriorates.

  On the other hand, in the ninth selection table, the rate at which the transition destination is determined to be mode A when the current rendering mode is mode B is compared with the ratio at which the transition destination is determined to be mode B when the current rendering mode is mode A. Small. The reason is that the current state is in a non-probable change state. Therefore, when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds and the ratio of the probabilistic state is large, the transition to mode A is large. This is because the consistency with the current uncertain change state deteriorates.

  In the 8th selection table and the 9th selection table, when the current effect mode is mode A, the ratio of shifting to mode N when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds than when it is 5 seconds The data is set so that becomes larger. Further, in the eighth selection table and the ninth selection table, when the current production mode is mode B, the mode shifts to mode N when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds. Data is set so that the percentage of

  In the eighth selection table and the ninth selection table, when the current effect mode is mode A, the ratio of shifting to mode N when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds than when it is 5 seconds The reason why the transition destination selection ratio is set to be large is that when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds and when the mode A is set in the latent mode, the mode B is set. This is because the probability of being in an indeterminate state is higher than that in time, so that an effect that matches such a control state is performed. Similarly, in the eighth selection table and the ninth selection table, when the current effect mode is mode B, the mode stop time is 5 seconds when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds. The reason why the transition destination selection ratio is set so that the transition ratio becomes larger is that when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds and the mode B is set in the latent mode, the mode A is This is because the probability of being in an indeterminate state is higher than when it is, so that an effect that matches such a control state is performed.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a tenth selection table to a twelfth selection table stored in the effect control ROM. In each selection table, the relationship between the current production mode, the extracted random SR3 value, and the destination production mode is set.

  FIG. 31J shows a tenth selection table that is selected when the probability mode is in the latent mode and the stored symbol stop time is 13 seconds. In the tenth selection table, when the current production mode is mode N, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode N> mode B> modes A and C. When the current production mode is mode A, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> modes N and C. When the current production mode is mode B, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A> modes N and C. When the current effect mode is mode C, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode C> mode A> modes B and C.

  FIG. 31 (K) shows an eleventh selection table that is selected when the probability change state is in the latent mode and the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds. FIG. 31 (L) shows a twelfth selection table that is selected when the probability mode is in the latent mode and the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds.

  In each of the eleventh selection table and the twelfth selection table, when the current presentation mode is mode N, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is a magnitude relationship of mode N> mode B> mode A> mode C. Is set in

  In the eleventh selection table, when the current rendering mode is mode A, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode B> mode C> mode N. On the other hand, in the twelfth selection table, when the current production mode is mode A, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode A> mode C> mode B> mode N. . When the present performance mode is mode A, the data is set so that the rate of transition to mode C is greater when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds. . In addition, when the current effect mode is mode A, data is set so that the rate of transition to mode N is greater when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds than when it is 5 seconds. ing.

  In the eleventh selection table, when the current rendering mode is mode B, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode C> mode A> mode N. On the other hand, in the twelfth selection table, when the current production mode is mode B, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode B> mode A> mode C> mode N. . When the present performance mode is mode B, the data is set so that the rate of transition to mode C is greater when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds than when it is 5 seconds. . In addition, when the current effect mode is mode B, data is set so that the rate of transition to mode N is greater when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds. ing.

  In the eleventh selection table and the twelfth selection table, when the current effect mode is mode A, the proportion of the transition to mode C when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds The reason why the transition destination selection ratio is set to be large is that when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds and when the mode A is set in the latent mode, the mode B is set. This is because there is a high probability that the state is in a probabilistic state as compared to the time, so that an effect in accordance with such a control state is performed. Similarly, when the current effect mode is mode B in the eleventh selection table and the twelfth selection table, when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds, it is changed to mode C than when it is 5 seconds. The reason for setting the transition destination selection ratio so as to increase the transition ratio is that when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds and the mode B is set in the latent mode, the mode A is This is because there is a higher probability that the state is in a probabilistic state than when it is, so that an effect in accordance with such a control state is performed.

  In the eleventh selection table and the twelfth selection table, when the current effect mode is mode A, the ratio of shifting to mode N when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds than when it is 5 seconds The reason why the transition destination selection ratio is set to be large is that when the stored symbol stop time is 6 seconds and when the mode A is set in the latent mode, the mode B is set. This is because the probability of being in an indeterminate state is higher than that in time, so that an effect that matches such a control state is performed. Similarly, when the current effect mode is mode B in the eleventh selection table and the twelfth selection table, the mode stop time is 5 seconds when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds than when it is 6 seconds. The reason why the transition destination selection ratio is set so that the transition ratio becomes larger is that when the stored symbol stop time is 5 seconds and the mode B is set in the latent mode, the mode A is This is because the probability of being in an indeterminate state is higher than when it is, so that an effect that matches such a control state is performed.

  In the eleventh selection table, when the current production mode is mode C, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode C> mode B> modes A and N. On the other hand, in the twelfth selection table, when the current production mode is mode C, the selection ratio of the transition destination mode (including no transition) is set in a size relationship of mode C> mode A> modes B and N.

  FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control data holding area. For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 32 is provided in the RAM incorporated in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. It has been. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 32 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated in accordance with an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 56 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 55 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 56 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 56 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 56 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 56 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 56 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 32a, the first and second start port switches 13a, The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as 14a and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). In the following, step S is simply referred to as S. Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 31 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes a special symbol process (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 8b, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 56 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 10 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 are possible. Enables setting of tilting movement of blades. In the normal symbol process, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first certain change state or the short time state, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 as compared to the normal state or the second certain variation state. Settings and controls are performed to increase the possibility of doing so. For example, when the first probability variation state or the short-time state is established, the control for making the normal symbol variation display time in the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display device 10 shorter than that in the normal state or the second probability variation state, Control to improve the probability that the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol in the game will be “per normal figure” than in the normal state or the second probability variation state, and normal variable based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure” Control that makes the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the winning ball device 15 longer than that in the normal state or the second certain variation state, control that increases the number of tilts than in the normal state or the second certain variation state, or these Settings for performing a combination of some or all of the controls are performed.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 transmits the control command from the main board 31 to the sub control board such as the effect control board 80 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 57 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 80, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing to the off state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 33 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 56 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the CPU 56 first reads the input port data stored in the predetermined input port register (S201). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal at the input port included in the I / O 57 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 13a. ), And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 14a. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in S201 is “1” (S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, 1 Update so as to count up by adding (S203). On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that it is “0” (S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S204). .

  After executing one of the processes of S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in S201 is “1” (S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value which is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is set to 1 for example. Update so as to count up by adding (S206). On the other hand, if it is determined in S205 that it is “0” (S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S207). .

  After executing one of the processes of S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as the winning determination value ( S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “ 1 ”is set (S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in S208 (S208; No), it is determined whether the second starting winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value (S211; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (S213).

  After executing one of the processes of S210 and S213, the CPU 56 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (S215 in FIG. 36). At this time, if the read value in S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in S208 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value in S208 shown in FIG. 35, and it is determined in S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the first special symbol display is performed. The first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the container 8a and the display of variation of the decorative symbols is established. Further, after it is determined in S211 shown in FIG. 35 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, in S215, when it is determined that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the second special symbol display is performed. The second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the device 8b and the display of the decorative pattern variation is established.

  Thus, when the read value does not reach the upper limit value in S215 (S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of S217, the CPU 56 sets and stores the start data corresponding to the start port buffer value at the head of the empty area in the start data storage unit 151C (S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, start data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, start data indicating “second” is set. Then, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter. (S219). Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, whereby each random value is stored (S220). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. In some cases, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in S220, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is made (S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the storage address (first address) of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address (head address) of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. The

  Further, the CPU 56 stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 54 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit (S222). The first start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command. When the second start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command As the processes of S221 and S222, only the storage address of the command table corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer among the first start port winning specification command table and the second start port winning specification command table. That's fine. For example, when the special symbol process process is finished, the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. Following the winning designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in S215 (S215; Yes), after executing the process of S222, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (S223). ). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (S223; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S224), and then shown in FIG. The process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (S223; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S225), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends.

  In this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect a game game start winning that is effective at the same time, both are performed by the process executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the start winning of a game ball in which the switch is effective is detected is executed. That is, when it is determined in S208 shown in FIG. 35 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processes of S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. 35 are executed, and then S215 shown in FIG. After executing the process of S222, the process proceeds to S211 shown in FIG. 35 after executing the process of S224 in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “1” in S223. When it is determined in S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 35 is executed, and then the processing of S215 to S222 shown in FIG. 36 is executed. Then, in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “2” in S223, the process of S225 is executed, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings. .

  After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special symbol storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the special game is started by the display 8b. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, whether the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the attached symbol or the like is “big hit” or “small hit” Whether or not the change display result is derived and displayed is determined (predetermined). Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the decorative symbol variation display state is in a reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process for determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. The process etc. which measure is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is decremented or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the special symbol display 8a or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, it is passed by the common timer. Time measurements are taken. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change process of S112 is performed by changing the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol indicator 8b. It suffices if the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game used is controlled by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b are set to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop and display the fixed special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol. Is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the value of the special process flag is set to “ Update to "4". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the open state for the big winning opening based on the fact that the change display result is “big hit”, etc. Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is determined according to whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain variation”, “15R uncertain variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, or “2R certain variation”. You may make it set. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state corresponding to “15R non-probability change” or “15R probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29”. "Seconds" and the number of times of opening of the big winning opening as the number of executions of the round is set to "15 times". On the other hand, in the case of being controlled to the two round big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type being “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set. In addition to setting “0.5 seconds”, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of rounds executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during opening of the big winning opening is based on processing for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. A process for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop the supply of the solenoid drive signal with respect to the solenoid 21 for special prize opening doors should just be performed.

  The post-opening process for the special winning opening in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, The process includes a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The jackpot end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot ending process, an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. For example, a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period of time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to a special game state or a normal state corresponding to a jackpot type, and the like.

  The small hit release pre-processing of S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of a variable winning action in the small hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The process etc. which perform are included. At this time, for example, in response to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds” and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process of S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 21 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process of S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. It includes processing to wait until Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (S231). At this time, if the total pending storage number count value is other than “0” (S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (S232). Here, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in start data storage unit 151 </ b> C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C has a lower rank than the hold number “1”. The stored contents of the start data stored in the entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in S232 is “first” or “second” (S234).

  When it is determined in S234 that the start data is “first” (S234; first), the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. Corresponding to the establishment of the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (S235). On the other hand, when it is determined in S234 that the start data is “second” (S234; second), the second special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. In response to the start condition being satisfied, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (S236).

  After executing one of the processes of S235 and S236, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start data read in S232 (S237). For example, when the start data is “first”, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. And numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 are read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the holding data stored in association with the holding number “1” in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 are read out.

  Subsequent to the processing of S237, 1 is subtracted from the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start data, and an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “2” in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start data). The entry of the pending data stored in the entry corresponding to “4” is shifted up by one entry (S238). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory count value is decremented by 1, and the stored data stored in the first special figure reserved memory 151A is shifted up by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Subsequent to the processing of S238, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is selected as a use table for determining whether the variation display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost”. And set (S239). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 11A is set as the use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 56 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this way, and as a predetermined specific determination, the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in S237 is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” according to whether or not it matches any of the determined values assigned to the variation display result (S240).

  When it is determined in S240 that the variation display result is “big hit” (S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S241). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S242). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 read in S237, the jackpot type is set to “15R uncertain change”, “15R by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in S242. It is determined as one of a plurality of preset jackpot types such as “probability change”, “2R non-probability change”, and “2R probability change” (S243). When the variation special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of S236, the big hit type determination random number MR2-1 for the big hit type of “2R non-probable change” in the big hit type determination table 131. Is not assigned, the jackpot type is not determined to be “2R uncertain change”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( S244). As an example, if the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value is “0”, “15R probable” is “1”, “2R non-probable” is “2”, “ If it is “2R probability variation”, it may be “3”.

  If it is determined in S240 that the variable display result is not “big hit” (S240; No), the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in S237 is “small hit”. In accordance with whether or not it matches any of the determined values assigned to the fluctuation display result of “”, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is “small hit” (S245). Then, when it is determined to be “small hit” (S245; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S246).

  After executing any of the processes of S244 and S246, it corresponds to the result of prior determination as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and further to the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state Then, a confirmed special symbol is set (S247). As an example, when it is determined in S245 that the fluctuation display result is not “small hit”, the “−” symbol that corresponds to the prior determination result that the fluctuation display result is “lost” The special symbol indicating the symbol “” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in S245 that the variable display result is “small hit”, the small hit symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when it is determined in S240 that the variable display result is “big hit”, “1”, “3”, “5”, which are big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in S243, One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the 15R non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. According to the determination result that the big hit type is “2R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the 2R non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “2R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” that is the 2R probability variation large hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S247, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S248), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in S231 (S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in S249, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 9 is sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example. To determine whether it has been transmitted. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 54 in the transmission command buffer. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process is completed. The

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (S261; Yes), one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. It is set as a use table for determining either (S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  If the big hit flag is off in S261 (S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (S263; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (S264). ).

  When the small hit flag is off in S263 (S263; No), the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second certain variation state, the first certain variation state, or the short time state. According to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 13 (D), one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to change the decorative symbol display state to the reach state. (S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S267). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR2-2 extracted in S267, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C set in S265 (S268). It is determined whether or not the result is a reach state (S269).

  If it is determined in S269 that the change display state is the determination result of the reach state (S269; Yes), one of the reach change pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C depending on the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (S270). On the other hand, when the determination result indicates that the change display state is not the reach state (S269; No), any one of the non-reach change pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C depending on the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is selected and set as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (S271).

  After executing any of the processes of S262, S264, S270, and S271, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S272). Based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in S272, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the use table set in any one of S262, S264, S270, and S271. (S273). If any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set in S262, when the processing of S273 is executed, the big hit type is set to “15R non-existing based on the big hit type buffer value, for example. It is only necessary to specify which one of “probability change”, “15R probability change”, “2R non-change probability”, and “2R probability change” is determined, and to determine the variation pattern type according to the specified jackpot type. In addition, when the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 is selected and set in S264, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified from the state of the probability variation flag or the short time flag, for example, when executing the processing of S273. The change pattern type may be determined according to the specified gaming state. When any one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set in S270, or when any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set in S271, the process proceeds to S268. The variation pattern type may be determined according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  Here, in the processing of S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition. Or the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in S268, using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type is determined by a common processing module. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in S273 in this way, the determination result (predetermined result) whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, or the variation pattern type determined in S273. Accordingly, one of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. 18 and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138 shown in FIG. 19 is selected and used to determine any one of the fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Set as a table (S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S275). Based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in S274 (S276).

  Here, in the processes of S275 and S276, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition is obtained. Regardless of whether to determine or to change the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the second start condition is established The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 used for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processes of S275 and S276, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in S268, a plurality of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Can be determined to be any of the types. As an example, in the process of S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in S276, a special diagram variation time which is a variation display time of a special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Is set so as to start the variation of the special symbol (S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed.

  After the process of S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol variation display are performed (S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 54 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area.

  When the setting in S279 is performed, every time the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 33 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, various changes are made from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The effect control commands are sequentially transmitted. FIG. 39 is a timing diagram showing an example of an operation for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 when starting the special symbol variation display in the special figure game. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is established, the CPU 56 executes the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 33 based on the transmission setting in S279 shown in FIG. In addition, a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the game state designation command, the first variation start command, or the second variation start command is transmitted after the variation display result notification command is transmitted first. Alternatively, the change pattern designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (S292). For example, in the process of S292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing of S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (S293). For example, in the processing of S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. It only has to be stored. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (S294). In addition, a setting for ending the special gaming state such as the first probability variation state, the second probability variation state, or the short time state is performed (S295). For example, in S295, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the time reduction counter for counting the number of remaining special game that can be executed until the time reduction state ends, etc. May be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (S296), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in S291 (S291; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (S297; Yes), a small hit start production waiting time is set (S298). For example, in the processing of S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (S300). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in S297 (S297; No), the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (S302). After executing one of the processes of S301 and S302, after determining whether or not to end the special game state such as the first probability change state, the second probability change state, or the short time state (S303), the special symbol stop process Exit. For example, in the processing of S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the processing of S303 may be ended. It should be noted that, for the first probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variation display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is ended even in the first certain change state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. In this way, when the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may also be terminated and the normal state may be obtained. For the probability variation control, the variation display result becomes “big hit” or a predetermined amount is further determined. Until the number of special figure games is executed, the second certain variation state may be continued.

  Further, in the process of S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and a probability variation control termination determination table stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended by referring to the above or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control has reached a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the probability variation control end is, for example, a value other than “0” in the total pending storage number count value in S231 shown in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermining) whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in S240.

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 41 (A), the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in S116 shown in FIG. 34, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit Is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has passed may be determined according to whether or not the jackpot is over. If the big hit end production waiting time has not elapsed in S311 (S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in S311 (S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (S312). Subsequently, a setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the jackpot type buffer read value that is the jackpot type buffer value read in S312 is performed (S313). FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a setting example in S313. As shown in FIG. 41 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time reduction state to the number of time reductions. Set to counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1”, a setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the first certain variation state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state. When the big hit type buffer read value is “2”, the setting for starting the control to set the gaming state to the normal state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 maintains both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag in the off state. When the big hit type buffer read value is “3”, a setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the second certain variation state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to the on state, while maintaining the time reduction flag in the off state.

  After the setting in S313, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (S314), and then the big hit end processing is terminated.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 32a provided in the gate 32 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (S131). When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is turned on (S131; Yes), processing at the time of passing the gate is executed (S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is in the off state (S131; No), the process of S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Determine whether. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored common charts is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 56 determines the display of the usual chart from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for use is extracted. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR5 is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 13a is in the OFF state, the following S140 is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of -S144 is performed.

  The normal symbol normal process of S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display 10 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process of S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the normal diagram display result, the normal symbol display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. A determination is made as to whether the normal map display result as the variable display result is "per standard map" or "missing the general map". Here, in the common figure display result determination table 130C, when the gaming state is the first certain change state or the short time state, the common figure display result is “per common figure” as compared to the normal state or the second certain change state. The decision value to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to the normal display result so that the ratio of the decision to be made becomes high. As a result, in the first probability variation state and the short-time state, the base map display result is more likely to be “per base diagram” than in the normal state and the second probability variation state, and thus the second start formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15. The winning opening 14 is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning prize) into the second starting winning opening 14.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change time corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. Here, in the common figure display result determination table 130C, the normal figure change time is set to be shorter in the first certain change state or the short time state than in the normal state or the second certain change state. As a result, in the first probability variation state and the short-time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variation display result in the ordinary game is shortened, so that the interval for deriving and displaying the variation display result of “per symbol” is also displayed. The second starting prize opening 14 formed by the normally variable prize winning ball device 15 is easily expanded and opened, and the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening 14 (start prize). In addition, in the general chart display result determination table 130C, the determination ratio of the normal chart change time is set to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player can recognize whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the usual fluctuation time to some extent.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, even when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, the opening control time for opening the second start winning opening 14 and the tilt control time consisting of the number of times of opening are set. Good. Here, in the normal map display result determination table 130C, the opening time is longer and the number of opening times is larger in the first certain variation state or the short time state than in the normal state or the second certain variation state. Is set to Thereby, in the special game state such as the first certain change state or the short time state, the time for the second start winning opening 14 to be in the expanded open state becomes longer and the number of times of opening increases, so that the game ball becomes the second start winning opening 14. It becomes easy to enter (start prize). In addition, in the general chart display result determination table 130C, the determination rate of the opening time and the number of times of opening is set to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player can recognize to some extent whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the combination of the opening time and the number of times of opening. The setting related to the tilt control may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in S143 and the normal electric accessory operation process in S144.

  The normal symbol variation process of S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, settings are made to vary the normal symbol in the regular symbol game by the normal symbol display 10. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is the normal symbol change display result when the normal symbol stop process of S143 is executed and the change is stopped. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time. Then, when the normal time fluctuation time is reached, the value of the normal time process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process of S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display unit 10 is set to stop and display the normal symbol variation display result. It should be noted that the setting for stopping and displaying the normal symbol variation display result is set to “3” when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation processing of S142. It may be performed before the update. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 is driven. After the setting for tilting control with the movable blade piece as the tilting position, such as the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, is performed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”.

  In the case of setting the normal power operation pattern in the normal symbol stop process of S143, the normal signal display result is selected by selecting the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the general symbol display result determined in the normal symbol determination process of S141. Different opening times and opening times may be set accordingly. Alternatively, when the normal power operation pattern is set in S142, it may be determined whether or not the hourly flag is on, and the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the determination result may be set. In this case, when the normal symbol variation display is started, for example, the hourly flag is OFF corresponding to the big hit gaming state, etc., but when the normal symbol variation display result is stopped, the big hit gaming state When the hourly flag is turned on in response to the first probability change state or time-short state after the end of, the normal map display result was "per normal figure" in the first probability change state or time-short state Correspondingly, it is possible to set the opening time and the number of opening times of the second start winning opening 14. As a result, for example, even if the normal symbol variation display is started before the first probability variation state or the time-short state is entered, the normal diagram display result becomes “per normal diagram” after the first probability variation state or the time-short state. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second start winning opening 14 with difficulty. In the normal symbol stop process of S143, when it is determined that the usual figure display result is “ordinary figure loss”, the ordinary figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of S144 is executed when the value of the ordinary process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric actor actuating process, the movable wing piece of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the fluctuation display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting of tilt control for changing the second start winning opening 14 from the normally open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is generated in accordance with the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process of S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is driven and the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded open state is measured, and the elapsed time is changed to the normal electric actuating pattern. It is determined whether or not the corresponding tilt control time (open time) has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the tilt control time, the driving of the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped, and the movable blade piece is returned from the tilt position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening 14 is changed. Setting for changing from the expanded open state to the normal open state is performed. Then, when the number of tilts that make the second start winning opening 14 in the expanded open state reaches the number of open times corresponding to the normal operation pattern, the normal process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0”. That's fine.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process.

  In the effect control board 80, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S401), clears RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100, and sets various initial values. Also, register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 80 is performed.

  Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (S402), and various random values used for effect control are counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. The numerical data indicating the random value is updated by software. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, for example, among the input ports 103 shown in FIG. 7, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in S403 (S403; No), the process returns to S402. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on in S403 (S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S404), and command analysis processing is executed (S405). In the command analysis processing executed in S405, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read out and then read out. Settings and control corresponding to the production control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in S405, an effect control process process is executed (S406). In this effect control process, for example, an effect operation using various effect devices such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an audio output operation from the speaker 27, and a lighting operation in the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 is performed. The control content is determined, determined, set, etc. according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the game state storage process executed in the command analysis process in S405 shown in FIG. In the gaming state storage process shown in FIG. 44, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80 is stored on the presentation control board 80 side, and the presentation control CPU 101 or the like. Is a process that can be specified by

  In the gaming state storage process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (S451). At this time, if no gaming state designation command is received (S451; No), the gaming state storing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a gaming state designation command is received (S451; Yes), EXT data of the second byte in the gaming state designation command is extracted (S452). Then, after the EXT data extracted in S452 is stored in the game state buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like (S453), the game state storage process is terminated. In this way, it becomes possible to specify which of the plurality of types of gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is on the side of the effect control board 80 from the stored contents of the gaming state buffer by the processing of S453.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the following processes of S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. And run.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process of S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the effect display device 9 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 31. Decorative display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the display screen, the first attached symbol display 9a or the second attached symbol display This includes a process for determining whether or not to start the attached symbol variation display in 9b. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, a process of changing the background image may be performed in accordance with the transition of the effect mode as described later. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, if it is determined that the variation display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process of S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. In response to the above, in order to perform various performance operations including decorative display and variable display of attached symbols, final decorative symbols, temporary stop symbols, and notice effects that become final stop symbols according to the variation pattern and variation display results, etc. This includes a process for determining the presence / absence, a notice pattern, and the like, and selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance as a use pattern according to the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process of S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, various types of effect control patterns that are used patterns corresponding to the effect control process timer value stored in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. The control data is read out, and various kinds of effect control during the decorative pattern variation display are included. Then, in response to, for example, that the effect control process timer value has reached a predetermined variation display end value (for example, “0”) or that a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received, etc. A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the definite decorative symbol is displayed in full stop in response to the production control process timer value reaching the variation display end value, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Sometimes, without using the effect control command from the main board 31, it is possible to autonomously derive and display the determined decorative symbol on the effect control board 80 side to determine the variation display result. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decoration symbol variation end process in S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, if the variation display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4”. When the updated display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the change display result being “lost”.

  The effect process during the big hit control of S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70 and outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27, and turning on / off / flashing the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. A process of controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state, such as making a game, is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31.

  The effect process during small hit control in S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect processing during the small hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the effect display device 9. Displaying on the screen, outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, turning on / off light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by outputting signals to the lamp driver board 35 Processing for controlling various effects in the small hit gaming state, such as turning off / flashing, is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in S165, various effect control patterns CST2-2 and CRE1-1 shown in FIG. 22 are selected as effect control patterns to be used in sequence, and read from the various effect control pattern tables 182. Set the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the production operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the production control pattern according to the production control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such setting may be an effect operation common to 2R big hit / small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, and light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are turned on / off / flashing by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. The process of controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation. Further, in the ending effect process, there is a case where a process of changing the background image is performed in accordance with the transition of the effect mode as described later. At this time, for example, according to the transition example of the effect mode shown in FIG. 3, the effect mode corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state may be set.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start waiting process executed in S160 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not there is a variation start command transmitted from the main board 31, such as a first variation start command or a second variation start command. Is determined (S501). At this time, if neither the first variation start command nor the second variation start command is received (S501; No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. Determination is made (S502). The demonstration display flag is set to an on state when a process of S506 described later is executed, and is cleared to an off state when any of the processes of S512 and S516 is executed.

  If the demonstration display flag is off in S502 (S502; No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display setting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (S503). The demonstration display setting flag is turned on when a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received or when a process of S513 described later is executed. On the other hand, the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off when one of the processes of S505 and S518 is executed. If the demonstration display setting flag is OFF in S503 (S503; No), the customer waiting demonstration designation command is not received after the value of the production process flag is updated to “0”, so that the demonstration screen is displayed. The setting is not performed, and the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If the demonstration display setting flag is ON in S503 (S503; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (S504). Here, the demonstration display waiting time is the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol whose variation display result is “losing”, or the completion of the presentation operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Based on the above, it may be a time set in advance as a waiting time from the timing of receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 31 until the demonstration display of the demonstration image is started in the effect display device 9 . At this time, if the demonstration display waiting time has not elapsed (S504; No), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S504 that the demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (S504; Yes), the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off (S505), while the demonstration display flag is turned on. Set (S506). Subsequently, a setting for starting display of the demonstration screen is performed (S507). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109. The effect control CPU 101 reads out a predetermined demonstration display effect control pattern from a ROM built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100, and uses it as a use pattern for controlling the effect operation during the demonstration screen display. set.

  When the demonstration display flag is on in S502 (S502; Yes), or after executing the process of S507, a demonstration screen display command process is executed (S509). In this demonstration screen display command process, the production control CPU 101 updates the production control process timer, for example, and controls the control data (for example, the production control process timer value after the update from the demonstration display production control pattern set in S507). Display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.), various commands corresponding to the control data may be created and transmitted to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the like.

  After executing the demonstration screen display command process in S509, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display period has ended (S510). At this time, if the demonstration display period has not ended (S510; No), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process ends. On the other hand, when the demonstration display period ends (S510; Yes), settings are made to end the demonstration screen display (S511). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may set a timer initial value corresponding to the demonstration display waiting time in the effect control process timer. At this time, the demonstration display flag is cleared and turned off (S512), and the demonstration display setting flag is set to the on state (S513), and then the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S501 that a change start command has been received (S501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S514). At this time, if the demonstration display flag is on (S514; Yes), a setting for terminating the demonstration screen display is performed (S515). As an example, the effect control CPU 101 initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109 in the process of S515, as in the process of S511. On the other hand, in the process of S515, unlike the process of S511, it is not necessary to set the timer initial value corresponding to the demonstration display waiting time in the effect control process timer. At this time, the demonstration display flag is cleared and turned off (S516).

  When the demonstration display flag is off in S514 (S514; No), after executing the processing of S516, it is determined whether the demonstration display setting flag is on (S517). At this time, if the demonstration display setting flag is on (S517; Yes), the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off (S518). When the demonstration display setting flag is off in S517 (S517; No), after executing the process of S518, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation setting process. (S519), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variation display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variation display result notification command (S531). At this time, if the variation display result is “losing” (S531; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern changes the variation display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case (S532).

  When it is determined in S532 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S532; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination is determined (S533). In the process of S533, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the extracted symbol determination data table stored in the effect control ROM is used to correspond to the extracted random numbers. The symbol to be performed is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of decorative symbols. In this way, when determining the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is a chance big hit symbol combination (15R probability variable big hit symbol combination, 15R non-probable big hit symbol combination, 2R If it matches the combination of the big hit symbols (same as the combination of the small hit symbols in this embodiment), each stop symbol is corrected (for example, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol) so as to be a combination of the missing symbols. Is determined. In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined. By determining such a stop symbol, it is possible to prevent the combination of the confirmed decorative symbol from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination.

  When it is determined in S532 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (S532; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined (S534). In the process of S534, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and extracted from SR1-1 using the lost symbol determination data table stored in the effect control ROM. The symbol corresponding to the random number is determined as the stop symbol of the left and right decorative symbols that form the reach state, for example, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is, for example, the middle decorative symbol Is determined as the stop symbol. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol). By determining such a stop symbol, it is possible to prevent the combination of the confirmed decorative symbol from becoming a big hit combination.

  If the fluctuation display result is other than “losing” in S531 (S531; No), whether the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”, is 15 round big hit? It is determined whether or not (S535). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the big hit of 15 rounds (S535; No), if the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R positive change”, or Corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit”, the combination of the final stop symbol that becomes the variation display result of the decorative symbol is determined (S536). In the process of S536, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the data corresponding to the extracted random number is stored twice using the data table for determining the second opening chance stored in the effect control ROM. The opening chance is determined as the combination of the final stop symbols of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that constitute the symbol combination of “2R non-probability”, “2R probability change”, or “small hit”. In the data table for determining the second opening chance, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of second opening chances.

  When it is determined in S535 that it is a big hit of 15 rounds (S535; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” (S537). When the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and not “15R non-probability variation” (S537; No), the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (S538). In the process of S538, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is converted to the probability variable using the probability variation big hit symbol determination data table stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that make up the jackpot symbol combination (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, or the right symbol is any odd symbol combination such as “7, 7, 7”) Determine as a combination. In the probability variation jackpot symbol determination data table, each of the plural types of probability variation jackpot symbols is associated with the numerical data of SR1-1.

  When the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” (S5437 Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal big hit combination (non-probable variable big hit combination) is determined (S539). In the process of S539, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is normally obtained using the probability variation big hit symbol determination data table stored in the effect control ROM. A combination of left, middle, and right decorative symbols that make up a big hit combination (non-probable big hit combination) (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol is any combination of two, two, etc.) The final stop symbol combination is determined. In the non-probable variation big hit symbol determination data table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of non-probable variation big hit symbols.

  After executing any of the processes of S533, S534, S536, S538, and S539, the variation pattern type specified based on the received variation pattern designation command is “2R probability variation”, “2R non-variability variation”, or “ It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “small hit” (S541). When it does not correspond to any of these, it progresses to S546 mentioned later. On the other hand, when it corresponds to one of these, a stop time table is selected according to the variation pattern type (S542). In S542, when the variation pattern type corresponds to “2R probability variation”, the 2R probability variation stop time table of FIG. 23A is selected, and the variation pattern type is “2R uncertain variation” or “small hit”. 2R is selected, the 2R non-probable change / small hit stop time table of FIG. 23B is selected.

  Next, a random number SR2 for determining the symbol stop time is extracted (S543), and the symbol stop time (the symbol stop time described above for the decorative symbol) corresponding to the extracted numerical data of SR2 is extracted from the table selected in S542. Select and determine (S544). Then, the data specifying the symbol stop time determined in S544 is stored in the symbol stop time storage area provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 (S545), and the process proceeds to S546. Thereby, the data of the symbol stop time determined at the time of the variable display when “2R probability variation”, “2R non-probability variation”, or “small hit” is displayed can be used even after the variation display. Specifically, the stored symbol stop time is used in the effect mode transition determination in S626, which will be described later, and the effect mode transition determination in S640.

  In S546, a transition effect setting process is executed (S546). In the transition effect setting process, a process for setting an effect related to the transition of the effect mode is performed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the transition effect setting process executed in S546 of FIG. First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern type specified based on the received variation pattern designation command corresponds to “2R probability variation”, “2R non-variability variation”, or “small hit”. Is determined (S601). If it corresponds to one of these, the first mode transition setting process is executed (S602), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to any of these, the second mode transition setting process is executed (S603), and the process is completed.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first mode transition setting process executed in S602 of FIG. In the first mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 101 first determines that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short time state, the first certain change state, and the Which of the two probability variation states is specified (S621). Also, for example, from the stored contents of the effect mode buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, whether the current effect mode is mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, or mode N Is specified (S622). Here, the effect mode buffer only needs to be able to store the current effect mode in a identifiable manner by setting a stored value associated with the current effect mode. Further, the symbol stop time at the start of the current latent mode is specified based on the data specifying the symbol stop time stored in the symbol stop time storage area (S623).

  Then, based on the change display result determined in S601 of FIG. 48 and the symbol stop time specified in S623, any one of the first to sixth selection tables shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is changed to the mode. The table is selected as a table for determining the destination (S624). For example, when the variation display result is other than “2R probability variation” and the symbol stop time is 13 seconds, the first selection table is selected.

  Next, a random number SR3 for determining the effect mode is extracted (S625), and whether or not to change the effect mode based on the extracted numerical data of SR3 using the table selected in S624, and when The transition destination production mode is determined (S626), the data specifying the determination result is stored in the first mode transition setting area provided in the RAM (S627), and the process ends. As a result, the transition destination of the effect mode after the end of the hit game when the 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit is set.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second mode transition setting process executed in S603 of FIG. In the second mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 101 first determines that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short time state, the first certain change state, and the like, Then, it is specified which one of the second probability variation states (S631). Further, for example, from the stored contents of the effect mode buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, whether the current effect mode is mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, or mode N. Specify (S632).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode specified in S632 is mode J (S633). Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the mode J effect mode is an effect mode that is controlled in response to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit type of “15R uncertain change”. . Therefore, when the production mode is mode J (S633; Yes), it is determined based on the gaming state specified in S631 whether or not the short-time state has ended (S634). At this time, if the time-short state has been completed (S634; Yes), it is determined that the mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode N is executed (S635). On the other hand, when the time reduction state has not ended in S624 (S624; No), after executing the process of S635, the second mode transition setting process ends.

  If it is determined in S633 that the effect mode is not mode J (S633; No), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode K (S636). Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the mode K effect mode is an effect mode that is controlled in response to the first probability change state after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit type of “15R probability change”. is there. Then, when the variable display result is continuously controlled to the first certain variation state until the “big hit” is reached, it is not necessary to perform mode transition when starting the decorative symbol variation display. Therefore, when the production mode is mode K (S636; Yes), the mode transition setting process is terminated. If the first probability variation state is set to end before the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”, is the first probability variation state completed based on the gaming state specified in S631? It is sufficient to determine whether or not, and if it has been completed, execute a mode shift to shift to the mode N effect mode.

  If it is determined in S636 that the mode is not the effect mode of mode K (S636; No), based on the data specifying the symbol stop time stored in the symbol stop time storage area, the current latent mode is started. The symbol stop time is specified (S637).

  Then, based on the gaming state specified in S631 and the symbol stop time specified in S633, one of the seventh selection table to the twelfth selection table shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 is determined as the mode transition destination. Is selected as a table for this purpose (S638). For example, when the gaming state is “non-probability change state” and the symbol stop time is 13 seconds, the seventh selection table is selected.

  Next, a random number SR3 for determining the effect mode is extracted (S639), using the table selected in S638, based on the current effect mode identified in S632 and the extracted numerical data of SR3 as described above. The determination method determines whether or not to shift the effect mode, and the transition destination effect mode when the transition is made (S640). Then, in the value after the determination in S640 and the determination in S635, data specifying the determination result in S640 and the determination result in S635 is stored in the second mode transition setting area provided in the RAM (S642). The process ends. Thereby, the transition destination of the effect mode after the end of the variation display when the variation display result other than the 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, and small hit is set.

  Next, the description returns to FIG. After the transition effect setting process including the first mode transition setting process (S602) and the second mode transition setting process (S603) as described above is executed, among the effect control patterns prepared in advance. (S547). At this time, the production control CPU 101 selects one of the symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 185, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the usage pattern. Set as. In S547, when a variation display other than 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable variation big hit, or small hit is performed, each variation pattern designation among the variation times corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is performed. Based on a predetermined symbol stop time corresponding to the command, the timing for temporarily stopping the decorative symbol is set. For example, when the variation time is 30 seconds, if the symbol stop time is 2 seconds, control data for controlling the decorative symbol to be in a temporary stop state 28 seconds after the start of variation is set. In S547, when the 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable big hit or small hit variation display is performed, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is determined in S544, and in S545 Based on the stored symbol stop time, the timing for temporarily stopping the decorative symbol is set.

  In S547, for example, the mode transition effect control pattern table 181 corresponding to the transition destination effect mode determined and set in the first mode transition setting process (S602) or the second mode transition setting process (S603). Is selected as a usage pattern.

  The mode transition effect control pattern set in this way, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, transitions the background image from the background image corresponding to the mode before transition to the background image corresponding to the mode after transition. This is an effect control pattern to be (changed, switched).

  In the first mode transition setting process, when the transition to the effect mode is set, in the ending effect process of S166 in FIG. The effect control for transferring the background image is executed using the mode change effect control pattern that has been set.

  In addition, when the transition to the effect mode is set in the second mode transition setting process, in the decorative symbol variation start waiting process of S160 in FIG. The effect control for shifting the background image is executed using the mode transition effect control pattern set in S547. When the setting for shifting the effect mode is made in the second mode transition setting process, the effect control for shifting the background image may be executed during the variable display instead of after the variable display is finished. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the variable display.

  Following the processing of S547, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (S548). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus 9 is performed (S549). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in S547 is transmitted to the VDP 109, etc., and is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9. What is necessary is just to start the change of a decoration symbol in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of "left", "middle", and "right". Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (S550), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 101 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1) (S561), for example, and then performs the effect control on the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value shown in the pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is matched (S562). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (S562; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the timer determination value is matched in S562 (S562; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. , A part or all of the movable member control data) or the end code is read (S563). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated in the effect control pattern in the process of S562 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in the process of S563. Then, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read in S563 (S564). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (S564; No), the control of the effect operation according to the effect control execution data read in S563 is executed (S565), and the decorative symbol variation process is ended. To do. For example, in the process of S565, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, the lamp Of the signal output specified by the control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data being transmitted to the motor 86, a part or all of them are sequentially or in parallel. It may be performed (if only one operation is performed).

  When it is determined in S564 that the code is an end code (S564; Yes), the decorative symbol fluctuation display is performed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Three decorative symbols of left, middle and right are temporarily stopped and displayed (S564A). That is, by S547 described above, the end code is associated with the start timing of the temporary stop time set according to the symbol stop time, and when the start timing of the temporary stop time comes, the left, middle, and right 3 Temporarily stop display of two decorative designs. Then, for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time (a predetermined time equal to or longer than the symbol stop time described above) is set (S566). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (S567), the processing during the decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the decorative symbol stop command reception flag is set in order to confirm whether or not the decorative symbol stop command has been received. judge. If the decorative symbol stop command reception flag is set, the decorative symbol stop command reception flag is reset (S852) and temporarily stopped in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”. All the decorative symbols in the state are finally stopped (S853), and the process is terminated. As a result, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, when the decorative symbol stop command is received, a process of stopping all symbols for determining the display result of the decorative symbol is performed. The decoration symbol stop command is transmitted when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed on the game control microcomputer 560 side, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 stops all symbols in response to the reception of the decoration symbol stop command. As a result, in the variable display, the display result of the decorative symbol is determined when the symbol stop time as shown in FIG. 25 elapses. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol stop command reception flag is not set in S851, that is, when the decorative symbol stop command reception flag is reset in response to reception of the decorative symbol stop command, the waiting start designation command reception waiting time is set. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S854). Here, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is the time set in the process of S566 shown in FIG. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in S854 (S854; No), it is transmitted from the main board 31 by determining whether or not the hit start designation command reception flag is set. It is determined whether or not a hit start designation command has been received (S855). At this time, if no hit start designation command is received (S855; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S855 that a hit start designation command reception flag has been received because the hit start designation command reception flag is set (S855; Yes), the hit start designation command reception flag is reset (S856). Among various effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 182, various effect control patterns CST 1-1, various effect control patterns CST 1-2, and various effect controls prepared to notify the start of the big hit gaming state One of the patterns CST2-1 is selected and set as a use pattern (S583). At this time, for example, which of the various effect control patterns CST1-1, the various effect control patterns CST1-2, and the various effect control patterns CST2-1 is used as the usage pattern based on the jackpot type specified from the change display result notification command. May be determined.

  Thereafter, for example, effect control execution data included in the various effect control patterns selected in S857 is read (S858). Subsequently, the control of the hit notification operation is executed according to the effect control execution data read in S858 (S859). For example, in the process of S859, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, the lamp Of the signal output specified by the control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data being transmitted to the motor 86, a part or all of them are sequentially or in parallel. It may be performed (if only one operation is performed). Thereby, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the output operation of the sound and sound effect from the speaker 27, the lighting operation of the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25, the moving operation of the movable member 78, etc. The change display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit”, and it can be notified that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  Subsequent to the process of S859, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit control (S860), and then the decorative symbol variation end process ends. If it is determined in S854 that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (S854; No), the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” (S861). The process at the end of the decorative symbol variation ends.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The effect control board 80 receives the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 31 based on the first or second start condition being satisfied. Correspondingly, based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, the production control CPU 101 of the production control microcomputer 100 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109 in S547 shown in FIG. . Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols vary. Be started.

  When the 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects and determines the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol and stores it in the RAM. Then, after the end of the two round big hit game state based on the “2R probability change” big hit type, after the end of the small hit game state based on the “small hit” variation display result, the latent mode is set, and the production mode is mode A, mode One of B, Mode C, and Mode N is selected. The effect mode at this time is selected and determined in accordance with whether or not the state is likely to be changed and information including the stored symbol stop time. Thereby, the player's interest at the time of entering the latent mode can be attracted to such a symbol stop time.

  Thereafter, in the latent mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the effect mode every time the variable display is executed. . The effect mode at this time is selected and determined according to whether or not it is in a probable variation state and information including the stored symbol stop time. Thereby, the player's interest in the latent mode can be attracted to such a symbol stop time.

  Further, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 has prepared a plurality of variation pattern types in advance using, for example, any one of the variation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. Decide on one. Thereafter, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, in the process of S276 illustrated in FIG. 38, for example, any one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance using one of the variation pattern determination tables illustrated in FIGS. decide. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. Further, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In other words, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the distribution of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  The timing at which the mode transition is executed is not limited to the timing after the end of the 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probability big hit or small hit hit gaming state, and after the end of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be executed within a predetermined period until the last stop symbol that is the variation display result is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display is started.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description has been made assuming that after the 15-round big hit gaming state is finished, the state is controlled to the time reduction state or the first probability variation state. On the other hand, it may be controlled to the second probability variation state even after the end of the 15 round big hit gaming state. In addition, the game may be controlled to the first certain change state after the two-round big hit gaming state ends. If the change display result does not become “big hit” even after a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special game is executed after being controlled to the first certain change state, the time reduction control is terminated and the second You may make it control to a probability change state. In this case, the time reduction state ends without being changed to the “big hit” and the normal state is controlled, and the first certain change state ends without changing the result of the change display to “big hit”. When controlled to the probable change state, it is possible to shift to a common effect mode (for example, the effect mode of mode A in the above embodiment) so that the possibility that the gaming state is the second probability change state can be suggested. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the circuit board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device such as the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28, and the effect member such as the movable member 78 are mounted. It has been described that the lamp driver substrate 35 is provided. On the other hand, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers, movable members, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the audio output board 70 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp driver board 35. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the production operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production display device 9 and the control content of the audio output operation in the speaker 27 are determined. Each control board executes processing for determining the control content of various rendering operations, such as processing for determining and processing for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b has been described, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with one special symbol display. Can be applied.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “2R uncertain change”, so the second start Based on the fulfillment of the condition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is assumed that the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” and the normal state is not set after the end of the two round big hit gaming state. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variation display result is set to “big hit” based on the establishment of the second start condition and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” at a constant determination rate. It may be possible to be determined. In this case, in the jackpot type determination table 131, even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value may be assigned to the jackpot type of “2R uncertain change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. Thereby, the table data in the jackpot type determination table 131 can be simplified, and the data capacity stored in the ROM 54 can be reduced. Note that when the second start condition is satisfied, it may be determined that the big hit type of “2R uncertain change” is made at a lower determination ratio than when the first start condition is satisfied. As a result, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 in a predetermined special game state such as the first probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is determined to be “2R non-probability variation”. The possibility of becoming a two-round big hit gaming state in which almost no can be obtained can be reduced, and the decline of the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the gaming state is not changed after the small hit gaming state ends. On the other hand, after the end of the two-round big hit gaming state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R uncertain change”, the fluctuation display result is big hit with “big hit”. In the above description, it is assumed that the control state is changed to the second probability variation state after the end of the two round big hit gaming state based on the fact that the type is “2R probability variation”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the case where the jackpot type is “2R probability variation”, the case where the jackpot type is “2R non-probability”, and the case where the variation display result is “small hit”. Only one of them may be provided.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, an example in which the degree of expectation for the probability change state in the latent mode is different according to the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol variation display will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 53, (A) shows the 2R probability change stop pattern table used when the hit type that triggered the latent mode is “2R probability change”, and (B) shows the cause of the latent mode. A 2R non-probable change / small hit stop pattern table used when the hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “small hit” is shown.

  In the stop pattern tables of FIGS. 53A and 53B, the correspondence relationship between the symbol stop time described above, the numerical data of the random SR4 for determining the stop pattern, and the stop pattern is shown. The random SR4 is a random value counted in the range of 1 to 401 by the effect control CPU 101 on the effect control board 80 side.

  Referring to FIGS. 53A and 53B, the stop pattern is selected from a plurality of types of stop patterns 1 to 3 as stop patterns. The stop pattern 1 is a pattern that stops in the order of the symbol display areas 9L, 9R, and 9C whose decorative symbols are “left”, “right”, and “middle”. Stop pattern 1 is a stop pattern that is basically executed when not in the latent mode. The stop pattern 2 is a pattern that stops in the order of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R whose decorative symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The stop pattern 3 is a pattern that stops in the order of the symbol display areas 9R, 9L, and 9C whose decorative symbols are “right”, “left”, and “middle”. The stop patterns 2 and 3 are stop patterns that are not executed when not in the latent mode. Thus, the stop patterns 1 to 3 are stop patterns having different orders in which the decorative symbols stop. In the stop pattern tables of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B), the numerical data of random SR4 is allocated to any one of stop patterns 1 to 3 at different rates for every symbol stop time of 13 seconds, 6 seconds, and 5 seconds. ing.

  In the stop pattern tables of FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B), the ratio at which stop pattern 1 is selected is set such that 5 seconds <6 seconds <13 seconds. Further, the ratio of the selection of the stop pattern 2 is set such that 13 seconds <5 seconds <6 seconds. Further, the ratio of the selection of the stop pattern 3 is set such that 13 seconds <6 seconds <5 seconds.

  Further, in the 2R probability change stop pattern table of FIG. 53 (A), when the symbol stop time is 13 seconds as compared to the 2R non-probability change / small hit stop pattern table of FIG. 53 (B), the stop pattern 1 The ratio at which the stop patterns 2 and 3 are selected is set large, and the ratio at which each of the stop patterns 2 and 3 is selected is set small. In addition, in the 2R probability change stop pattern table of FIG. 53 (A), when the symbol stop time is 6 seconds and 5 seconds, respectively, compared to the 2R non-change probability / small hit stop pattern table of FIG. 53 (B). In addition, the ratio at which the stop pattern 1 is selected is set to be small, and the ratio at which each of the stop patterns 2 and 3 is selected is set to be large.

  The selection of the stop pattern using the stop pattern table shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B is performed, for example, when the effect control pattern is determined in S547 according to the first embodiment. Accordingly, any one of the stop patterns 1 to 3 is selected at the time of the variable display when the latent mode is started and every time the variable display is executed in the subsequent latent mode.

  With the settings as described above, when the symbol stop time is 5 seconds, the probability that the probability variation state is high as described above is higher than when the symbol stop time is 13 seconds, and the rate at which the stop patterns 2 and 3 are selected is higher. Since it is high, the display of variation in stop pattern 2 or stop pattern 3 is executed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the probability change state can be enhanced. In addition, when the symbol stop time is 5 seconds, the probability that the probability change state is higher as described above and the rate at which the stop pattern 3 is selected is higher than that when the symbol stop time is 6 seconds. By executing the variable display, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the probability variation state. Further, since the ratio selected in the stop pattern 3 is higher in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state, the variation display is executed in the stop pattern 3, so that Expectation can be raised.

  In this way, in the latent mode, the ratio of the probability variation state varies depending on the decorative pattern stop pattern in the variation display that has been controlled in the effect mode of the latent mode, so whether or not it is in the probability variation state. The variation of the direction to suggest becomes abundant and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the second embodiment, an example is shown in which the proportion of the probable change state varies depending on the decorative pattern stop pattern in the variable display that is triggered by the effect mode of the latent mode. However, in addition to this, also in the variable display executed in the latent mode, the ratio of the probability change state may be different depending on the decorative pattern stop pattern.

  Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, the example from which the stop order of a decoration symbol differs was shown as several types of stop pattern from which the ratio which is a probability variation state differs according to a stop pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as such a plurality of types of stop patterns, a plurality of predetermined types of stop lines that have different decorative line stop lines may be employed.

  Further, instead of the stop pattern or in addition to the stop pattern, the ratio of the probability change state may be different depending on the type of decorative design to be stopped (for example, odd number design, even type design). . Further, in the second embodiment, the stop pattern as described above is controlled so that the presentation mode is easily promoted according to the stop pattern, and the promotion mode of the presentation mode is different depending on the stop pattern. May be.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when it is decided to re-promote to any of modes A, B, and C after falling from any of modes A, B, and C to mode N, the destination An example will be described in which the production mode is controlled so that the expectation for the probability variation state does not become lower than the production mode before the fall transition.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a second mode transition setting process according to the third embodiment. The second mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 54 is different from the process shown in FIG. 50 in that any one of modes A to C in the latent mode after the transition destination effect mode is determined in S640. Is a fall promotion setting process (S641) for performing settings related to the fall from mode N to mode N and the promotion from mode N to any of modes A to C.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the drop promotion setting process executed in S641 of FIG.

  In the drop promotion setting process shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 101 first selects mode N from any of modes A, B, and C based on the effect mode specified in S632 and the effect mode determined in S640. It is determined whether or not it falls to (step S652). In the case of a fall from any of modes A, B, and C to the mode N, the data for specifying the current effect mode specified in S651, that is, the effect mode before the transition to the fall, is stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100. Store in the pre-fall transition effect mode storage area provided (S653). Then, it is determined to shift the effect mode to mode N (S654), and after the fall flag is set (S655), the process ends. Here, the fall flag is a flag indicating that a fall has occurred from any of modes A, B, and C to mode N.

  If it is determined in S652 that the mode has not fallen from any one of modes A, B, and C, it is determined whether or not the fall flag described above is set (S656). When the fall flag is not set, it is determined to shift the rendering mode from the current rendering mode to the rendering mode corresponding to the transition determination result in S640 (S663), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fall flag is set, it is determined whether or not the transition determination result in S640 is a re-promotion transition determination from mode N to modes A, B, and C (S657). If it is not the re-elevation transition determination, it is determined to shift the rendering mode from the current rendering mode to the rendering mode corresponding to the transition determination result in S640 (S663), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is a re-promotion transition determination, the degree of expectation to the probability change state of the transition destination production mode by the re-promotion transition determination is smaller than the expectation to the probability change state of the effect mode before the fall transition. It is determined whether or not (S658).

  In S658, based on the symbol stop time specified in S637, the re-promotion transition determination is performed by comparing the effect mode based on the transition determination result in S640 and the effect mode before the transition transition stored in S653 when the transition transition determination is made. It is determined whether or not the expectation degree to the probability change state of the effect mode at the transition destination is smaller than the expectation degree to the probability change state of the effect mode before the fall transition. Specifically, in S658, the magnitude relationship between the expectations is determined using the re-elevation expectation level table of FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a re-elevation expectation degree table. The re-elevation expectation degree table is a data table showing the magnitude relationship between the expectation degree for the symbol stop time and the probability change state of the effect mode, and is stored in the effect control ROM. The expectation level for the probable change state of the production mode is that the size relationship of mode B <A <C is set when the symbol stop time is 5 seconds and 13 seconds, and mode A <B when the symbol stop time is 6 seconds. <C magnitude relationship is set.

  When it is determined in S658 that the degree of expectation is high, it is determined to shift to the production mode based on the re-promotion transition determination result in S640 (S659), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S658 that the degree of expectation is small, the effect mode is changed from the current effect mode to the effect mode before the fall transition stored in the effect mode storage area in S655 when the effect transitions to the mode N. Is determined (S660). And the data which specifies the production mode before fall transition memorize | stored in the production mode storage area are reset (S661), the fall flag is reset (S662), and a process is complete | finished.

  In this way, in the fall promotion setting process, when the transition from one of modes A, B, and C to the mode N is performed, the effect mode before the transition is stored, and thereafter, the change display is performed. When it is decided to re-promote from mode N to any of modes A, B, and C based on the transition determination of the production mode, the production mode at the transition destination is compared with the production mode before the fall transition. When the degree of expectation for the probability variation state is low, it is set to re-elevate to the production mode before the fall transition. Thereby, once being fallen to the mode N, a player's sense of expectation is not scraped off, and a decrease in the player's interest can be prevented.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as the mode transition effect performed when the effect mode transitions, it suggests the ease of mode transition that falls from one of modes A, B, and C to mode N, and from mode N. An example of performing a mode transition effect that suggests the ease of mode transition that is promoted to one of modes A, B, and C will be described.

  Here, the mode transition effect will be described. FIG. 57 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an example of the mode transition effect. In FIG. 57, (A) to (C) show examples where a weak effect is performed as a mode transition effect, and (D) to (F) show examples where a strong effect is performed as a mode transition effect. .

  The mode transition effect is performed as a turn effect during the latent mode. Note that the roaring effect is an effect that suggests whether or not there is a high possibility that the gaming state is shifted to the probabilistic state during the latent mode, and indicates whether the directing mode in the latent mode is promoted or falls. It is a production for.

  When the effect mode shifts during the latent mode, the background image changes from the background image corresponding to the transfer source effect mode as shown in (A) and (D) as shown in (C) and (F). The background image corresponding to the previous effect mode is switched. When the mode transition effect is performed, when the background image is switched, the background image corresponding to the transition mode (current state) effect mode is faded out and the background color is red as in (B) or (E ), And after displaying the letters “shift to rendering mode?” In the display area at the bottom of the screen as shown in (B) and (E), the promotion transition as shown in (C) An effect is displayed in which the subsequent background image, the background image after the fall transition as in (F), or the current background image (the background image before the transition effect) is displayed. Such a mode transition effect is performed during variable display unlike the case of the above-described embodiment. Such a mode transition effect may be performed after the end of the variable display, as in the case of the above-described embodiment.

  Here, the mode transition effect is provided with a pattern (effect mode) for changing the background image color to red and a pattern (effect mode) for changing to white. The mode transition effect of the pattern that changes the background image color to white as in (E) is a mode change mode from any one of modes A, B, and C compared to the mode transition effect that changes the background image color to red. Since the probability of falling to N is set high (strong), it is called a strong effect in terms of falling to mode N. Further, when the mode transition effect of the pattern that changes the background image color to red as in (B) is selected compared to the mode transition effect that changes the background image color to white, the effect mode is mode A, Since the probability of falling from either B or C to mode N is set low (weak), it is called a weak performance in terms of falling to mode N.

  On the other hand, the mode transition effect of the pattern that changes the background image color to red as in (E) is different from the mode transition effect that changes the background image color to white. Since the probability of being promoted to either B or C is set high (strong), it is called a strong performance from the viewpoint of promotion from mode N. Further, the mode transition effect of the pattern that changes the background image color to white as in (B) is different from the mode transition effect that changes the background image color to red, and the effect mode changes from mode N to modes A, B, C. Since the probability of promotion to one of the above is set to be low (weak), it is called a weak performance in terms of promotion from mode N.

  Thus, during the latent mode, whether or not the production mode is likely to fall to mode N depending on whether the background image color is changed to red or white in the mode transition production, and the production mode is mode N. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not there is a high possibility of being promoted. Thereby, the player can be interested in whether or not the mode transition effect is executed during the latent mode, and what color the background color changes when the background fades out in the mode transition effect. Interest is improved.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a mode transition effect determination table according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 shows a first mode transition effect determination table used when the variation display executed after the latent mode is started is less than 100 times in (A), and the latent mode is started in (B). A second mode transition effect determination table used when the variable display executed after the time is 100 times or more is shown. These mode transition effect determination tables are stored in the effect control ROM.

  58A and 58B, the correspondence relationship between the numerical data of the random SR5 for determining the mode transition effect and whether or not the mode transition effect is executed is shown. The random SR5 is a random value counted in the range of 1 to 31 in the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control board 80. In the mode transition effect determination tables of FIGS. 58A and 58B, the mode transition effect is executed when the mode transition effect is selected corresponding to the extracted numerical data of the random SR5, and the mode transition effect is executed. When None is selected, the mode transition effect is not executed.

  In the second mode transition effect determination table in FIG. 58 (B), the ratio at which the mode transition effect is present is set larger than in the first mode transition effect determination table in FIG. 58 (A). Thereby, when the variation display executed after the latent mode is started is 100 times or more, the ratio of the mode transition effect is increased as compared with the case where the change display is less than 100 times.

  Here, the number of variable displays executed after the latent mode is started is counted by, for example, a variable counter set in the ending effect process in S166 of FIG. In the ending effect process of S166, when the “2R probability change”, “2R non-probability change”, or “small hit” game state ends, the special symbols and the decorative symbols change in the latent mode after the end of these game states. Processing for setting a variation counter for counting the number of times of display is performed. As a result, every time “2R probability change”, “2R non-change probability”, or “small hit” is reached, the number of times of change display executed after the latent mode is started by the change number counter is started. Further, in the ending effect process of S166, if the counting state by the variation counter is set at the end of the game state of “15R probability change” or “15R non-change probability”, the count state is reset (the count value is changed). Reset and stop counting). As a result, the number of times of variation display by the variation counter is started each time “2R probability variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, or “small hit” is reached, resulting in “15R probability variation” or “15R uncertain variation”. Every time, the counting of the number of times of variation display by the variation counter is stopped. In addition, when “2R probability variation”, “2R non-accuracy variation”, or “small hit” is reached, the variation display counter starts counting the number of variation displays. When counting the number of times of display is being executed, the count is stopped and counting of the number of times of variation display by the variation number counter is newly started. The addition update of the count value of the variation display count by the variation count counter is performed in a transition effect setting process described later.

  FIG. 59 shows a fade-out background selection table according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 59, (A) shows the first fade-out background selection table used when the variable display executed after the latent mode is started is less than 100 times, and (B) shows that the latent mode is started. A second fade-out background selection table used when the variable display executed from 1 is 100 times or more is shown. These fade-out background selection tables are stored in the effect control ROM.

  59A and 59B, the first fade-out background selection table used when the variation display executed after the latent mode is started is less than 100 times is shown in FIG. ) Shows a second fade-out background selection table used when the variable display executed after the latent mode is started is 100 times or more. These fade-out background selection tables are stored in the effect control ROM.

  In the fade-out background selection table of FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the contents of mode transition determination (falling transition to mode N, transitioning from mode N, promotion mode maintenance) and random SR6 for fading out background selection The correspondence relationship between the weak performance and the strong performance selected by the numerical data is shown. The random SR6 is a random value counted in the range of 1 to 10 in the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control board 80.

  In the fade-out background selection tables of FIGS. 59A and 59B, the fade-out at the mode transition effect is performed when the weak effect is selected corresponding to the extracted numerical data of the random SR6 according to the contents of the mode transition. The background becomes a red background corresponding to the weak effect, and when the strong effect is selected, the fade-out background at the mode transition effect becomes the white background corresponding to the strong effect.

  In the second fade-out background selection table in FIG. 59 (B), the ratio at which the strong effect is selected is set higher than in the first fade-out background selection table in FIG. 59 (A). Thereby, when the change display executed after the latent mode is started is 100 times or more, the ratio of executing the strong effect in the mode transition effect is higher than when the display is less than 100 times.

  When the fade-out background is selected using the fade-out background selection table shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, when the variation display executed after the latent mode is started is 100 times or more, the variation display is displayed. A player who is less likely to be controlled in a probabilistic state because the strong performance suggesting that the rate of falling to mode N is high compared to when it is less than 100 times is executed at a high rate. The discrepancy between the sensation (recognition) and the actual control (the suggestion effect is executed with high probability) can be eliminated, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the mode transition effect determination using the mode transition effect determination table of FIGS. 58A and 58B is performed, when the variation display executed after the latent mode is started becomes 100 times or more, Compared to when the change display is less than 100 times, the mode transition effect is executed at a high rate (high frequency), in which the strong effect suggesting that the rate of falling to mode N is high is executed at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the trap between the player's sensation (recognition) that is unlikely to be controlled in a probabilistic state and the actual control (a suggestion effect is executed with high probability) As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, a transition effect setting process that enables execution of the mode transition effect as described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a transition effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The transition effect setting process shown in FIG. 60 is different from the process shown in FIG. 48 in that the second mode transition setting process in S603 is followed by the determination of the presence / absence of the mode transition effect as described above and the mode in S604 to S612. Processing for selecting the type of effect in the transition effect is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 60, after the second mode transition setting process in S603, it is determined whether or not the above-described variation number counter is set (countable state) (S603A). If the variation counter is not set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set, the variation counter is updated by adding “1” (S603B). Then, the numerical data of the random SR5 for determining the mode transition effect is extracted (S604). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the above-mentioned variation counter that counts the number of variation displays executed after the latent mode is started indicates 100 times or more (S605).

  When the value of the variation counter is less than 100, the mode transition effect is executed based on the numerical data of the random SR5 extracted in S604 using the first mode transition effect determination table of FIG. 58 (A). The presence or absence is determined (S606). On the other hand, when the value of the variation counter is 100 times or more, based on the numerical data of the random SR5 extracted in S604, using the second mode transition effect determination table of FIG. The presence or absence of execution is determined (S607).

  After determining whether or not the mode transition effect is performed in S606 or S607, it is determined whether or not the mode transition effect is determined based on these determinations (S608). When it is determined that there is no mode transition effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a mode transition effect, numerical data of random SR6 for selecting a fade-out background is extracted (S609). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the above-mentioned variation counter that counts the number of variation displays executed after the latent mode is started indicates 100 times or more (S605).

  When the value of the variation counter is less than 100, using the first fade-out background selection table of FIG. 59A, the numerical data of the random SR6 extracted in S609 and the second mode transition setting process (S603) On the basis of the mode transition decision content (falling to mode N, promotion from mode N, mode maintenance) determined in step S611, either a weak effect or a strong effect is selected (S611), and the process ends. . On the other hand, when the value of the variation counter is 100 times or more, using the second fade-out background selection table of FIG. 58 (B), the numerical data of the random SR6 extracted in S609 and the second mode transition setting process ( Based on the content of the mode transition determined in S603) (falling to mode N, promotion from mode N, maintaining mode), one of weak performance and strong performance is selected (S612), and the process is performed. finish.

  In the transition effect setting process as described above, when it is determined to execute the mode transition effect of the weak effect or the strong effect, the effect control pattern for executing the mode transition effect is determined in S547 of FIG. A plurality of mode transition effect control patterns stored in the mode transition effect control pattern table 181 are selected and set as a use pattern. Thereby, the mode transition effect of the weak effect or the strong effect determined in the transition effect setting process is executed.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in S602 and S603 in FIG. 48, S627 in FIG. 49, S631 to S642 in FIG. 50, and S547 in FIG. 47, in the latent mode, the effect control when the decorative symbols are changed and displayed. It is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the probable change state, and the modes of the effects by the plurality of modes A to C, N having different expectations of being controlled to the probabilistic state It is controlled by either. Thereby, the player's expectation with respect to the probable change state can be increased depending on the type of the mode of effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the same variation pattern type can be selected for 2R probability variation big hit and small hit or 2R non-probable big hit, and control is performed in either the normal state or the probability variation state. The display result of the decorative design is derived and displayed without being specified. In the case of 2R probability change big hit, the symbol stop time is determined based on the 2R probability change stop time table in FIG. 26 (A), and in the case of small hit, the 2R non-probability change / small hit stop time table in FIG. 26 (B). The symbol stop time as described above is determined depending on whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit or 2R non-probable big hit control is performed. Time is determined at a different rate. In addition to S624 to S627 of FIG. 49, the first selection table to the sixth selection table of FIG. 28 and FIG. Based on the pre-latency data selection table, whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit is selected and determined according to the symbol stop time, and the transition destination production mode is determined based on the determined selection table. As shown, since the mode of the production is controlled according to whether it is controlled to the probable state or the normal state by the two-time release control, and the symbol stop time, the length of the symbol stop time This can increase the player's expectation for the probable change state. Since the combination of such an effect mode and the symbol stop time can increase the player's expectation for the probable change state, the player's interest can be directed to the stop timing of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the production mode can be identified. Further, for the player, recognizing the length of the symbol stop time becomes difficult to recognize compared to, for example, recognizing that a notice that the probability change state has been made has been made. As a result, it is difficult to be sure whether the player is controlled to be in a probabilistic state based on the length of the symbol stop time. Therefore, in such a latent mode after the two-time release control, the player It is possible to be interested in whether or not the state is always invariable.

  (2) In S638 to S640 of FIG. 50, in the latent mode, the seventh selection table to the twelfth selection table of FIG. 30 and FIG. Based on the selection table, whether or not it is in a probable change state, and selected and determined according to the symbol stop time, and the transition destination production mode is determined based on the determined selection table, In the latent mode, when it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, it is controlled to the probability changing state according to at least whether it is controlled to the normal game or the probability changing state and the symbol stop time. Since the rate at which the transition to mode C is determined is high, the player's expectation for the probable change state depends on the length of the symbol stop time. It can be increased. Such a symbol stop time makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the probable change state, so that the player's interest can be directed to the stop time of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the production mode can be identified. Further, for the player, recognizing the length of the symbol stop time becomes difficult to recognize compared to, for example, recognizing that a notice that the probability change state has been made has been made. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the player is controlled to the probability variation state based on the length of the symbol stop time, so control is made to one of a plurality of types of modes in such a latent mode. The player can be interested in whether or not the player is always in a probable state.

  (3) In S638 to S640 in FIG. 50, in the latent mode, the seventh selection table to the twelfth selection table in FIG. 30 and FIG. Based on the selection table, whether or not it is in a probable change state, and selected and determined according to the symbol stop time, and the transition destination production mode is determined based on the determined selection table, In the latent mode, when it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, it is controlled to the probability changing state according to at least whether it is controlled to the normal game or the probability changing state and the symbol stop time. Since the rate at which the transition to mode N is low is expected, the player's expectation for the probable change state depends on the length of the symbol stop time. It can be increased. Such a symbol stop time makes it possible to upset the player's expectation with respect to the probable change state, so that the player's interest can also be directed to the decorative symbol stop time. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed at a time other than the time when the production mode can be identified. Further, for the player, recognizing the length of the symbol stop time becomes difficult to recognize compared to, for example, recognizing that a notice that the probability change state has been made has been made. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the player is controlled to the probability variation state based on the length of the symbol stop time, so control is made to one of a plurality of types of modes in such a latent mode. The player can be interested in whether or not the player is always in a probable state.

  (4) Regarding the mode A and the mode B in the latent mode, when the symbol stop time is the first symbol stop time (for example, 5 seconds) and when the symbol stop time is the second symbol stop time (for example, 6 seconds). Since the relationship between the ratio of the determination to shift to the mode C having high expectation of being controlled in the probability variation state is reversed, the combination of the length of the symbol stop time and the type of the mode of the production, Even in the same type of mode, the rate at which it is determined to shift to mode C of a higher type selected when controlled to the probability variation state differs depending on the length of time when the symbol is stopped. Further, the player's interest can be directed to the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the symbol stop time is the first symbol stop time and when the symbol stop time is the second symbol stop time, the production mode is controlled to mode A and when it is controlled to mode B. The height of the ratio controlled to the probability change state is different, so that the player can be more interested in the symbol stop time. Regarding the modes A and B in the latent mode, when the symbol stop time is the first symbol stop time (for example, 5 seconds) and when the symbol stop time is the second symbol stop time (for example, 6 seconds), Since the level relationship of the rate at which it is determined to shift to the mode N where the degree of expectation of being controlled to the probability variation state is low is reversed, the same depending on the combination of the length of the symbol stop time and the type of the mode of the production Even in the mode of the type, the rate at which it is determined to shift to the mode N of the type with a low rate of selection when controlled to the probability variation state varies depending on the length of time when the symbol is stopped. The player's interest can be directed to the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 26, the first symbol stop time (5 seconds) and the second symbol stop time (5 seconds) are compared with the time difference (7 seconds) between the second symbol stop time (6 seconds) and the third symbol stop time (13 seconds). The time difference between the 1st symbol stop time and the 2nd symbol stop time is the 2nd symbol stop time and the 3rd symbol so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the time difference (1 second) from the 2 symbol stop time (6 seconds). It is set smaller than the time difference from the stop time. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the time difference in the length of the symbol stop time, so in the latent mode, the player is convinced whether or not the probability variation state is controlled based on the length of the symbol stop time. Since it is difficult, it is possible to have more interest in whether or not the state is the probability variation state when in the latent mode.

  (6) When the stop time of 5 seconds or 6 seconds, which has a high rate of probability variation in FIGS. 53A and 53B, is selected, the rate of selection of stop pattern 2 or stop pattern 3 is high. As shown, the production mode is controlled according to the variation of the decorative pattern when the opening control is performed twice, which suggests the expectation that the probability mode is controlled in the latent mode. There will be plenty of variations in production, which can further enhance the fun of the game.

  (7) Any of modes A, B, and C when the fall condition is satisfied, such as when the fall transition from mode A, B, or C to mode N is determined in the mode transition determination of S640 in FIG. Falls to mode N, but a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, as in the case of the mode transition determination in S640 of FIG. 50, when it is determined to re-promotion transition from mode to N mode A, B, or C. Then, promotion control may be performed again in any of modes A, B, and C. As a result, even after falling from any of modes A, B, and C to mode N, the player is given a sense of expectation of being controlled again by any of modes A, B, and C. Can be improved. Moreover, when the production mode determined to be re-promoted by S640 has a higher expectation level than the production mode before the transition to fall, the production mode is determined to be promoted and transitioned by S659, and the production mode determined to be re-promoted by S640. When the degree of expectation is lower than the production mode before the fall transition, as shown in S660, the transition to the production mode before the fall is made, after once falling from any one of the modes A, B, C mode to the mode N, there When the promotion control is again performed to any of the modes A, B, and C, the mode A, B, and C controlled before the mode N is controlled, or the mode is more accurately changed than the mode. It is controlled to a mode in which the degree of expectation that the state is controlled is high. Thereby, once falling from any one of the modes A, B, and C to the mode N, the player's expectation is not lost, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered. .

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, when the number of changes is 100 times or more, the ratio of selecting a strong effect is set higher than when the number of changes is less than 100 times. In the latent mode, if the number of executions of the decorative pattern change display after being controlled to one of the modes A, B, and C is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, it is suggested that the falling condition is satisfied. Among the suggested effects, strong effects that have a high probability that the falling condition is satisfied are executed at a higher rate than when the number of executions of the variable display is less than the predetermined number of times, so that they are controlled in the probability change state in the latent mode. Can eliminate the discrepancy between the player's experience (recognition) and the actual control (the content of the suggested performance performed with high probability). Can be improved.

  (9) The second mode transition effect determination table in FIG. 58 (B) selected in S607 in FIG. 60 when the number of changes is 100 times or more is selected in S606 in FIG. 60 when the number of changes is less than 100 times. Compared with the first mode transition effect determination table of FIG. 58 (A), the ratio of executing the mode transition effect including the strong effect and the weak effect is set by setting the ratio for performing the mode transition effect determination high. As indicated by the fact that in the latent mode, if the number of executions of the special symbol and decorative symbol change display after being controlled to one of the modes A, B, and C modes exceeds the predetermined number, the fall condition is Since the suggestion effect that suggests that it is established is executed at a higher rate than when the number of executions of the variable display is less than the predetermined number, it is possible to be controlled in the probability change state in the latent mode. To eliminate the discrepancy between the player's low sensation (recognition) and the actual control (the content of the suggested performance executed with high probability), and as a result, to improve the interest of the game Can do. In this way, the suggestion effect (mode transition effect) that suggests that the falling condition for increasing the execution rate is satisfied when the number of changes is 100 times or more compared to when the number of changes is less than 100 times. In addition to the effects such as the strong effect and the weak effect as described above, background transition control for shifting (falling) from mode A, B, or C mode to mode N may be used. In other words, if the number of fluctuations is 100 times or more and the number of fluctuations is less than 100 times, the effect of increasing the execution rate is any suggestive effect that suggests that the fall condition is satisfied. It may be a production.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) The device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5 do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. Any change and modification can be made within the range. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (2) The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling it in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. You may take a form.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the game is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like are stored in an internal memory or the like. A form that can be executed once stored, or a form that is directly executed using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like may be used. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (4) The transition determination of the effect mode in the latent mode described in the above-described embodiment may be periodically performed every time the variable display is executed once, and the variable display is executed a plurality of times such as ten times. It may be performed regularly every time. In addition, it is determined whether or not the transition of the effect mode in the latent mode is performed every time the variable display is executed once or each time the variable display is executed a plurality of times, and is performed according to the determination. Therefore, it may be performed irregularly.

  (5) As for the fluctuation display when 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or small hit, all the variation patterns selected from a plurality of variation patterns may be common, or a plurality of variations. Some of the variation patterns selected from the patterns may be common.

  (6) The 2R probability variable big hit, 2R non-probable big hit, or the small hit type, the play mode after the hit gaming state may be set to the latent mode, or the latent mode at a predetermined rate. (For example, it is determined at random whether or not to set the latent mode). In this case, the ratio of controlling to the latent mode may be set uniformly for 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probability big hit, and small hit, or may be set different from each other.

  (7) As a hit type that becomes the latent mode, a combination of at least 2R probability variation big hit and small hit may be used (when there is no 2R uncertain variation big hit), and at least 2R probability variation big hit and 2R non-variable big hit It may be a combination (when there is no small hit).

  (8) Before the display result of the special identification information (special symbol) is derived and displayed, and before the display result of the display information of the effect identification information (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed (of the decorative symbol of FIG. 25) The symbol stop time from the third symbol stop to all symbol stops, which is determined on the basis of the variation time of the special symbol) may be a time defined as follows. The time difference (1 second) between the first pre-confirmation time (5 seconds) and the second pre-confirmation time (6 seconds) is the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time (6 seconds) and the third pre-confirmation time (13 seconds). A time difference shorter than (7 seconds) is set (a time difference of 1 second is shorter than a time difference of 7 seconds). According to such a configuration, the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time is set to be shorter than the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time. Since it is difficult for a person to distinguish the time difference in the length of time before confirmation, it is difficult to be sure whether the game state is controlled to the special game state based on the length of time before confirmation. It is possible to have more interest in whether or not the game is in a special gaming state. It should be noted that the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time may be a time difference that is extremely difficult for the player to identify, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  (9) Before the display result of the special identification information (special symbol) is derived and displayed, and before the display result of the identification information for presentation (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed (the decorative symbol of FIG. 25) The symbol stop time from the third symbol stop to all symbol stops, which is determined on the basis of the variation time of the special symbol) may be a time defined as follows. The time difference (1 second) between the first pre-confirmation time (5 seconds) and the second pre-confirmation time (6 seconds) is set to be shorter than the first pre-confirmation time (5 seconds) (1 second The time difference is shorter than the pre-determined time of 5 seconds). According to such a configuration, the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time is set to a time difference shorter than the first pre-confirmation time. It is difficult to distinguish the time difference between the two, so it is difficult to be sure whether or not it is controlled to the special game state based on the length of the pre-determined time. It is possible to have more interest in whether or not. It should be noted that the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time may be a time difference that is extremely difficult for the player to identify, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  (10) Before the display result of the special identification information (special symbol) is derived and displayed, and before the display result of the identification information for presentation (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed (of the decorative symbol of FIG. 25) The symbol stop time from the third symbol stop to all symbol stops, which is determined on the basis of the variation time of the special symbol) may be a time defined as follows. The time difference (1 second) between the first pre-determination time (5 seconds) and the second pre-determination time (6 seconds) is set to a time difference shorter than a predetermined time difference (2 seconds). According to such a configuration, the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time is set to a time difference that is shorter than a predetermined time difference. Since it becomes difficult to distinguish the time difference of the length of time, it is difficult to be sure whether or not it is controlled to the special game state based on the length of time before such determination, so when it is in the common performance mode It is possible to have more interest in whether or not the game is in a special game state. It should be noted that the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time may be a time difference that is extremely difficult for the player to identify, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  (11) As an example in which the degree of expectation for the probability variation state in the latent mode differs according to the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol variation display as shown in the second embodiment, the decorative symbol is a big hit The number of symbol stop lines that are valid for decorative symbol display when multiple symbol stop lines are set to indicate whether the symbol combination is used and the effective stop line can be changed Depending on (stop pattern), control may be performed to change the number of symbol stop lines so that the degree of expectation to the probability change state in the latent mode is different. Furthermore, in the case where the design color when the decorative design is stopped can be changed, the expectation to the probability change state in the latent mode is changed according to the design color (stop pattern) at the time of stoppage in the variation display of the decorative design. Differently, control for changing the design color may be performed.

  (12) For a plurality of production modes (modes A to C, N) in the latent mode, the mode having the highest expectation for the probability variation state (mode C) is changed to the mode having the least expectation for the probability variation state (mode N). You may make it perform mode transfer control which restrict | limits falling.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, the following effects can also be obtained. The degree of expectation for the probable change state by the combination of the production mode (modes A to C, N) in the latent mode and the symbol stop time (pre-determination time) in the variable display triggered by the latent mode. Because the player who is playing the game machine in the game mode (gaming machine) that is in the latent mode, the latent mode that other players who have moved the game machine (game machine) cannot know Since the degree of expectation for the probability variation state can be recognized, it is possible to make it difficult for the operating rate of the gaming machine to decrease. In addition, the symbol stop time (pre-decision time) as information for recognizing the expectation level for the probability change state in the latent mode is, for example, an advance notice that the length of the pre-determination time is recognized, for example, a special gaming state. Compared with the case of recognizing what has been done, it is harder to recognize, so the expectation for the probability variation state in the latent mode is known to other players other than the player who is playing the game machine. It can be difficult.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state is shown in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be in a state advantageous to the player. Is a variable winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 (which may be integrated with the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or may be configured separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20). May be in a state of controlling to a state advantageous to the player (predetermined open state).

  (15) The stop control of the variable display in the control for synchronizing the display of the special symbol and the display of the decorative symbol is received by the effect control microcomputer 100 receiving a decorative symbol stop command for confirming the display result of all the symbols of the decorative symbol. Or may be performed when the variable display time recognized based on the command specifying the variable display pattern (variable display time) received by the production control microcomputer 100 has elapsed. .

  (16) As an effect mode in the latent mode, as modes other than mode N, a plurality of types of modes as described above may be provided, or one type of mode may be provided. That is, at least one mode may be provided as an effect mode other than mode N in the latent mode.

  (17) In the latent mode, the mode transition determination between modes A to C and the transition determination from one of modes A to C to mode N (falling determination) may be performed at different timings. For example, the mode transition determination between the modes A to C is performed every time the variable display is performed once, and the transition display from any of the modes A to C to the mode N (falling determination) is performed 10 times as the variable display. What is necessary is just to perform every time it is performed (when the fall determination is performed, the mode transition determination between modes A to C is not executed).

  (18) In the embodiment described above, the probability variation state is shown as an example of the special game state, but the special game state may be the following game state. a State in which the fluctuation time reduction control of the first and second special symbols (control in which the time from the start of fluctuation to the derivation and display of the display result is shorter than the corresponding time in the normal state other than the fluctuation time reduction control state) is performed The normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened when the normal symbol variation time reduction control is performed, when the normal symbol hit control is performed, and when the d normal symbol is hit. Opening time extension control for extending the opening time of one time of the e variable variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a state where the opening number increasing control for increasing the number of times of opening is performed. The special game state may be a single control of any one of the probability change state and the a to the e, or a control in which two to five states are appropriately combined from the probability change state and the a to e. In other words, the special gaming state to be subjected to the control as described above is any special gaming state as long as it is a special gaming state that gives a special state advantageous to the player in addition to the specific gaming state. May be.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol is determined on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side and notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by an effect control command. In that case, the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol may be specified by the variation pattern designation command, or the symbol stop time of the ornament symbol may be specified by a dedicated command other than the variation pattern designation command. When the symbol stop time of the decorative symbol is specified by the variation pattern designation command, a plurality of types of variation patterns may be provided for each symbol stop time, and the variation pattern designation command may be selected and determined for each symbol stop time. When the symbol stop time is a fixed time according to each of the variation pattern designation commands in the variation display other than when the 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable variation big hit, or small hit, the fluctuation occurs. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the symbol stop time in advance according to the pattern designation command, the symbol stop time may not be designated by the command. Similarly, the symbol stop time is set to a fixed fixed time regardless of the type of the variation pattern designation command in the variation display except when 2R probability variation big hit, 2R non-probable variation big hit, or small hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the symbol stop time in advance, the symbol stop time may not be specified by a command.

  (20) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  7 gaming area, 13 first start winning opening, 14 second starting winning opening, 8a first special symbol display, 8b second special symbol display, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 9 effect display device, 20 special variable winning ball device 560 Microcomputer for game control, 100 microcomputer for effect control.

Claims (8)

It is possible to play a game ball into the game area, and display the variation of the special identification information based on the winning of the game ball in the start area provided in the game area and display the display result. A gaming machine comprising special display means for performing and a variable winning ball apparatus that changes to an advantageous state for the player,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to perform a predetermined specific determination before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed;
Specific determination means for determining whether or not to control to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the specific determination is performed by the prior determination means;
A special that changes the variable winning device to the advantageous state in a predetermined special mode when the specific determination is performed by the prior determination unit and the specific determination unit does not determine to control to the specific gaming state. Special determination means for determining whether or not to perform special transition control for shifting to a special gaming state in which the probability that the specific determination is performed by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state after performing the control;
State maintenance that maintains the gaming state before the special control is performed as a gaming state in which the special identification information is displayed in a variable manner after the special control is performed when the specific determination is not performed by the prior determination unit Maintenance decision means for deciding whether to perform control;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state according to the determination results of the specific determination means, the special determination means, and the maintenance determination means;
The presentation identification information is variably displayed in response to the change display of the special identification information, and the display result of the presentation identification information is derived and displayed before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed. Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect including the variable display effect that determines the display result of the effect identification information when the display result of the information is derived and displayed;
It is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is controlled to be the normal gaming state or the special gaming state as the mode of the rendering executed by the rendering control means when the display identification information for the variation is displayed. And an effect mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations of being controlled in the special gaming state.
The effect control means derives and displays the display result of the identification information for the effect so that it is impossible to specify which of the normal game state and the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and Depending on whether the special transition control is performed or the state maintenance control is performed, before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, until the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed. Determine the pre-confirmation time in different proportions,
The effect mode control means sets the mode of the effect according to at least whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and the time before the determination. A gaming machine characterized by controlling. It is possible to play a game ball into the game area, and display the variation of the special identification information based on the winning of the game ball in the start area provided in the game area and display the display result. A gaming machine comprising special display means for performing and a variable winning ball apparatus that changes to an advantageous state for the player,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to perform a predetermined specific determination before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed;
Specific determination means for determining whether or not to control to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the specific determination is performed by the prior determination means;
A special that changes the variable winning device to the advantageous state in a predetermined special mode when the specific determination is performed by the prior determination unit and the specific determination unit does not determine to control to the specific gaming state. Special determination means for determining whether or not to perform special transition control for shifting to a special gaming state in which the probability that the specific determination is performed by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state after performing the control;
A special that changes the variable winning device to the advantageous state in a predetermined special mode when the specific determination is performed by the prior determination unit and the specific determination unit does not determine to control to the specific gaming state. Normal determination means for determining whether or not to perform normal transition control for shifting to the normal gaming state after performing control;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state according to the determination results of the specific determination means, the special determination means, and the normal determination means;
The presentation identification information is variably displayed in response to the change display of the special identification information, and the display result of the presentation identification information is derived and displayed before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed. Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect including the variable display effect that determines the display result of the effect identification information when the display result of the information is derived and displayed;
It is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is controlled to be the normal gaming state or the special gaming state as the mode of the rendering executed by the rendering control means when the display identification information for the variation is displayed. And an effect mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations of being controlled in the special gaming state.
The effect control means derives and displays the display result of the identification information for the effect so that it is impossible to specify which of the normal game state and the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and Depending on whether the special transition control is performed or the state maintenance control is performed, before the display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, until the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed. Determine the pre-confirmation time in different proportions,
The effect mode control means sets the mode of the effect according to at least whether the normal game state or the special game state is controlled when the special control is performed, and the time before the determination. A gaming machine characterized by controlling.   The effect mode control means is controlled to the special gaming state when the special control is performed, and the first time is increased at a high rate in response to the pre-confirmation time being a predetermined first pre-confirmation time. The first mode is controlled at a high rate according to the fact that the mode of the effect is controlled to the mode, the special gaming state is controlled, and the pre-confirmation time is a second pre-confirmation time different from the first pre-confirmation time. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the mode of the effect is controlled to a second mode different from the mode. The production control means sets the pre-confirmation time to at least a first pre-confirmation time, a second pre-confirmation time longer than the first pre-confirmation time, and a third pre-confirmation time longer than the second pre-confirmation time. Decide on one,
Compared to the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time, the time difference between the first pre-confirmation time and the second pre-confirmation time is difficult for the player to distinguish. The time difference between the time and the second pre-establishment time is set to be smaller than the time difference between the second pre-confirmation time and the third pre-confirmation time. The gaming machine described in 1.   5. The production mode control means according to claim 1, further comprising controlling the production mode according to a variation mode of the production identification information when the special control is performed. The gaming machine described in 1. The production mode control means includes
It is a mode in which the degree of expectation that it is controlled to the special gaming state is high, and it is controlled by one of a plurality of types of high expectation modes that are different from each other in the degree of expectation that it is controlled to the special gaming state. A fall control means for controlling the mode of the effect to the normal mode having a lower expectation level than the high expectation mode when the predetermined fall condition is satisfied,
A promotion control means for controlling the mode of the effect in the high expectation mode when the predetermined promotion condition is established after being controlled to the normal mode by the fall control means;
The promotion control means is the high expectation mode that was controlled before being controlled to the normal mode by the fall control means, or the expectation that the special gaming state is controlled more than the high expectation mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the mode of the effect is controlled to a high expectation mode with a high degree. When the predetermined fall condition is established when the production mode control means is controlled in the high expectation mode in which the expectation that the special gaming state is controlled is high, the high expectation mode A fall control means for controlling the mode of the effect to a normal mode with a lower expectation level controlled to the special gaming state than
The production control means includes
Execution number counting means for counting the number of executions of the variable identification variable display after the effect mode control means has been controlled to the high expectation mode;
Suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute an suggestion effect that suggests that the falling condition is satisfied when controlled in the high expectation mode;
When the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means, a high-probability suggestion effect with a high probability that the falling condition is satisfied after the suggestion effect is executed, and a probability that the falling condition is satisfied An suggestion effect selection means for selecting an suggestion effect from a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a low probability suggestion effect lower than the high probability suggestion effect,
A suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect selected by the identification information effect selection means during the variation display of the effect identification information;
The suggestion effect selection unit selects the high probability suggestion effect at a higher rate when the number of executions counted by the execution number counting unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. Item 7. A gaming machine according to any one of Items 1 to 6. When the predetermined fall condition is established when the production mode control means is controlled in the high expectation mode in which the expectation that the special gaming state is controlled is high, the high expectation mode A fall control means for controlling the mode of the effect to a normal mode with a lower expectation level controlled to the special gaming state than
The production control means includes
Execution number counting means for counting the number of execution times of the variable display of the special identification information after the common performance mode control means is controlled to the high expectation mode;
Suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute an suggestion effect that suggests that the falling condition is satisfied when controlled in the high expectation mode;
When the suggestion effect determining means determines to perform the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect during the variation display of the effect identification information,
The suggestion effect determining means determines that the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate when the number of executions counted by the execution number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that:

Images